(scrolling_window): Fix code inserting runs in list of all runs.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
7495f7ca
EZ
44+++
45** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
46as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
47with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
48example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
49middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
50
1636ca09 51+++
a01cfb77
GM
52** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
53changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
54buffer by default.
55
c607d53d 56** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 57trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
58this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
59
4104194e
GM
60** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
61be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
62
c6f01e00
MB
63** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
64To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
65`auto-compression-mode' command.
66
4c724b32
DL
67** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
68`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
69
b856f39c 70+++
068127d6
GM
71** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
72operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
73
fd06c7da
MB
74** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
75(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
76remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
77may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
78
8ac08dea 79+++
62c273d7
DL
80** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
81is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
82
83+++
84** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
85mode `iswitchb-mode'.
86
8ac08dea 87+++
f393cf90
DL
88** Gnus changes.
89
90The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
91four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
92internationalization and mail-fetching.
93
94*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
95many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
96
97If you used procmail like in
98
99(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
100(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
101(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
102(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
103
327652be 104this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
105
106(setq mail-sources
107 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
108 :suffix ".in")))
109
110More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
111Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
112
113*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
114Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
115Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
116probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 117
60dd7e0e 118*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
119parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
120are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
121now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
122
123*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
124called to position point.
125
126*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
127summary buffers and NOV files.
128
129*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
130of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
131
132*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
133subtly different manner.
134
135*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
136and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
137ever-changing layouts.
138
139*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
140
72190b84 141*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
142
143** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1448859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
145more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
146empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
147window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
148on.
149
ba9eeda1
GM
150** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
151set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
152file that is already visited under a different name.
153
42ac0ae5
GM
154** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
155nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
156
157** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
158recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
159signaled.
160
ba9eeda1 161** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
162support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
163use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
164buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
165M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
166new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
167
b941a14b 168+++
ba9eeda1 169** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 170and displays information about that.
b941a14b 171
ba9eeda1 172** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
173file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
174
d7b38c05 175** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 176added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
177Postscript files are included.
178
179** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
180`dired-ref.tex'.
181
25ad1371
GM
182** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
183expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
184
185This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
186determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
187mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
188interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
189regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
190associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
191
b856f39c 192+++
f0298744
DL
193** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
194displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
195menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
196menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
197
9a8d84ca
DL
198** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
199a version-dependent component.
200
d76c03ea
GM
201** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
202Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
203will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
204character is still bound as before.
205
3b4fa1b2
DL
206** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
207using that menu.
208
40e857ea 209** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 210suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 211
beb2eb00 212+++
c08398de
DL
213** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
214buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
215contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
216by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
217insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
218the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
219Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
220
db7a3ede 221+++
3d6cd763
GM
222** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
223coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
224escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
225such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
226recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 227always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 228read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
229(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
230RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 231
0b8a3a6d
DL
232** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
233environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
234
424d8b44 235+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
236** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
237point in a pop-up window.
238
6d35b49f 239+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
240** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
241displays all characters in that character set.
242
243** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
244coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
245
a4067978 246+++
5cb6a58e 247** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 248on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
249defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
250commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 251
424d8b44 252+++
a1b8d58b
GM
253** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
254
6e417ca5
DL
255** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
256been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
257
424d8b44 258+++
5898e075
DL
259** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
260`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
261indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
262indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
263
424d8b44 264+++
abfcc168
GM
265** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
266sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 267(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
268You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
269
424d8b44 270+++
cc181e95
GM
271** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
272on the display using several methods
273
424d8b44 274+++
cc181e95
GM
275- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
276a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
277be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
278
424d8b44 279+++
cc181e95 280- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 281equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 282
da4496b6 283- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
284
285- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
286the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
287
424d8b44 288+++
3b4fa1b2 289** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 290an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 291command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 292does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 293
424d8b44 294+++
176256a1 295** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
296`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
297typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 298
dd0add8e
DL
299** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
300characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
301
bf3ba9ac 302+++
699238d9
GM
303** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
304compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
305this behavior.
306
307The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
308compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
309Emacs dump core.
310
424d8b44 311+++
699238d9 312** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 313
7233c5bd
GM
314*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
315whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
316is useful for debugging X problems.
317
318Example:
319
699238d9 320 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 321
100b3cbb
GM
322*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
323visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
324the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
325and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
326visual class names are
327
328 TrueColor
329 PseudoColor
330 DirectColor
331 StaticColor
332 GrayScale
333 StaticGray
334
335Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
336`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
337meaning.
338
339The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
340supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
341`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
342visual.
343
344Example:
345
699238d9 346 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
347
348*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
349specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
350default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
351resource values are `true' or `on'.
352
353Example:
354
699238d9 355 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 356
0d0c76b8
EZ
357** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
358more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
359now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
360
42088c12 361** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 362display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
363shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
364be customized.
c60ea02e 365
424d8b44 366+++
31047e0d
DL
367** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
368
424d8b44 369+++
b02786f9
GM
370** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
371all frames except the selected one.
372
3261c1d8
DL
373** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
374to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
375
ffe36136 376** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
377the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
378MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
379displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
380
0292b49f 381+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
382** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
383MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 384
559cee90
DL
385** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
386read mail from the menu etc.
387
480b5773 388+++
271b4185
GM
389** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
390a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
391
0daee095
GM
392** Changes in Texinfo mode.
393
a5e350c9 394*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
395macros
396
397 Key binding Macro
398 -------------------------
399 C-c C-c C-s @strong
400 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 401 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 402 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 403 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
404 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
405 M-RET @item
406
407*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 408
559cee90
DL
409** Changes in Outline mode.
410
411There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
412`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
413the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
414
327652be 415** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 416
c0a8c108
EZ
417+++
418*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
419with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
420are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
421Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
422buffers to kill, as before.
423
424Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 425i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
426this way.
427
956777b3
GM
428** Changes to Show Paren mode.
429
430*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
431The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
432use. Default is 1000.
433
f6989277 434+++
404fa7d6
DL
435** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
436groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
437
424d8b44
DL
438+++
439** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
440M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
441M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
442buffers.
8964fec7 443
424d8b44 444+++
39783d73
WP
445** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
446under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
447.emacs file.
448
449The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
450determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
451
d35fce81
GM
452** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
453abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
454`directory-abbrev-alist'.
455
a933dad1
DL
456** Faces and frame parameters.
457
458There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
459Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
460`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
461`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
462sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
463for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
464parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
465
466Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
467`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 468`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
469`default' face and vice versa.
470
d80061fa 471+++
f77a4a8a
GM
472** New face `menu'.
473
474The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
475Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
476attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
477
424d8b44 478+++
a933dad1
DL
479** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
480
481The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
482colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
483correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
484the screen gamma of a frame's display.
485
486PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
487in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
488color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
489
490The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
491`ScreenGamma'.
492
493** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
494
495The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
496Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
497oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
498of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
499the text.
500
501** Emacs has a new face implementation.
502
503The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
504font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
505height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
506These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
507specify a font.
508
509Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
510These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
511under Lisp changes, below.
512
513** New default font is Courier 12pt.
514
424d8b44
DL
515+++
516** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
517of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
518otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
519
520** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
521truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
522foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
523customizing face `fringe'.
524
8d0f00fd
MB
525** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
526You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
527
528The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
529versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
530and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
531
532** LessTif support.
533
424d8b44
DL
534Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
535You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
536
537** Toolkit scroll bars.
538
539Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
540LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
541configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
542bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
543bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
544Emacs.
545
546When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
547Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
548Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
549Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
550define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
551`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
552
553Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
554a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
555directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
556different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
557system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
558add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
559
560The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
561`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
562This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
563image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
564Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
565
566** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
567
568When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
569widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
570Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
571
424d8b44 572+++
a933dad1
DL
573** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
574
575When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
576whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
577defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
578highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
579displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
580whitespace.
581
6e612d4d 582+++
a933dad1
DL
583** Busy-cursor.
584
585Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
586display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
587
424d8b44 588+++
a933dad1
DL
589** Blinking cursor
590
591M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
592terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
593and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
594the group `cursor'.
595
8ac08dea 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
598
599This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
600generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
601See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
602details.
603
604Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
605have to do anything to activate it.
606
607** Tabs and variable-width text.
608
609Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
610defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
611independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
612Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
613
614** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
615
424d8b44 616+++
a933dad1
DL
617*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
618
619 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
620
79dd1637
RS
621The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
622LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 623
79dd1637
RS
624*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
625LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 626
34d90e29 627+++
a933dad1
DL
628** Hscrolling in C code.
629
cc181e95
GM
630Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
631`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
632customized.
a933dad1 633
8ac08dea 634+++
a933dad1
DL
635** Tool bar support.
636
637Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
638of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
639changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
640displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
641if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
642icons will be used.
643
644To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
645for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
646also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 647
424d8b44 648+++
a933dad1
DL
649** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
650
651Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
652mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
653line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
654about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
655in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
656
657Currently, the following actions have been defined:
658
659- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
660buffers.
661
662- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
663M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
664
665- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
666
424d8b44
DL
667- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
668`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
669
670- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
671
672** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
673
674When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 675from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
676non-nil.
677
678** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
679
680Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
681Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
682the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
683italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
684Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
685attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
686on terminals.
a933dad1 687
54a9404d
EZ
688The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
689supported on character terminals.
690
a933dad1
DL
691** Sound support
692
2f516940 693Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 694driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 695supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 696
424d8b44 697+++
a933dad1
DL
698** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
699the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
700forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
701value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
702users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
703even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
704
705The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
706
0e18b431 707+++
a933dad1
DL
708** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
709
710As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
711drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
712`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
713
fdd8bb68 714+++
a933dad1
DL
715** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
716bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
717
718This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
719`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
720variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
721
c5d00c64 722+++
a933dad1
DL
723** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
724
725When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 726value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 727number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 728fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
729
730When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
731value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
732number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 733fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
734
735** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
736notably at the end of lines.
737
738All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
739spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
740
424d8b44 741+++
eee54b0e
DL
742There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
743
a933dad1
DL
744** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
745query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
746after each match to get the replacement text.
747
00782214 748+++
d5483ab1
GM
749** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
750you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 751
424d8b44 752** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
753you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
754lisp-complete-symbol.
755
7af69644 756+++
a933dad1
DL
757** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
758
163ea954 759If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
760longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
761is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
762minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
763
764- User option: max-mini-window-height
765
766Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
767fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 768specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
769
770Default is 0.25.
771
a299a6f0
GM
772- User option: resize-mini-windows
773
774How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 775resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
776grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
777again.
778
779Default is `grow-only'.
780
2f72fd2f
GM
781** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
782
0d43b60d
GM
783** Changes to hideshow.el
784
785Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
786selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
787conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
788
789*** Generalized block selection and traversal
790
791A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
792(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
793which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
794`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
795point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
796(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
797
798If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
799i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
800backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
801the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
802
803*** Isearch support for updating mode line
804
805During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
806blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
807line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
808portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
809is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
810
811To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
812something like this in your .emacs.
813
814 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
815 (lambda ()
816 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
817
327652be
TTN
818*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
819
820Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
821header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
822`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
823moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
824block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
825behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
826useful.
827
828You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
829function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
830of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
831code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
832appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
833
834(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
835 (hs-hide-level 1)
836 (forward-sexp 1))
837(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
838
839The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
840emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
841only for code blocks.
842
843*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
844
845Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
846parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
847display for implementation.
848
849*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
850
851The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
852LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
853which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
854new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
855
856 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
857 hs-show-block C-c C-s
858 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
859 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
860 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
861 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
862 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
863
864These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
865
559cee90
DL
866** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
867
424d8b44 868+++
1b24b888
GM
869*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
870an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
871log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
872
424d8b44 873+++
1b24b888
GM
874**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
875current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
876
877+++
1b24b888
GM
878*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
879in a log file.
eb2aac9d 880
502004be 881+++
1b24b888
GM
882*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
883entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 884
502004be 885+++
1b24b888 886*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
887version number is performed based on regular expressions from
888`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
889Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 890
2c63c979 891*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 892
79c78e77
GM
893** Changes to cmuscheme
894
895*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
896`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
897
3476b54a
GM
898** Changes in Font Lock
899
900*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 901font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 902
2c63c979
SM
903*** multiline patterns are now supported.
904
a5e350c9
SM
905*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
906the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 907
601e0081
SM
908*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
909Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
910
b3b98592
GM
911** Comint (subshell) changes
912
988cded7
MB
913These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
914include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
915
916*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
917to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
918parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
919user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
920this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
921respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
922feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
923`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
924
925*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
926and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
927
988cded7 928*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
929buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
930buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
931
932The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
933M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
934the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
935
988cded7
MB
936*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
937and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
938see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 939
988cded7 940*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
941saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
942argument, it appends to the file.
943
988cded7 944*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
945(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
946compatibility.
947
0e40b809
EL
948*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
949ring (history).
d648cc45 950
e26cec67
GM
951** Changes to Rmail mode
952
b97cd2cc 953*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
954set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
955receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
956recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
957`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
958as correspondent.
959
960Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
961mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 962regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 963
3b55acc9
GM
964*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
965to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
966Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
967with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
968for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
969
6a1950ec
GM
970*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
971like `j'.
972
5bb6f079
RS
973*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
974specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 975digest message.
e26cec67 976
993d8b7d
DL
977*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
978in which folder to put messages automatically.
979
400a1ed0
GM
980** Changes to TeX mode
981
a5e350c9 982*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
983`latex-mode'.
984
a5e350c9
SM
985*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
986
987*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
988
989*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 990
a933dad1
DL
991** Changes to RefTeX mode
992
993*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
994 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
995 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
996 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
997 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
998 can be edited from that buffer.
999
1000*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1001 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1002 `A' to use all marked entries).
1003
1004*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1005 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1006
1007*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1008 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1009 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1010 been cited.
1011
38de9631
GM
1012** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1013The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1014semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1015in column 1 are always made leaves.
1016
a933dad1
DL
1017** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1018has the following new features:
1019
1020*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1021may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1022to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1023time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1024
1025*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1026feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1027file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1028compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1029pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1030defaults to 1.
1031
5d94f558 1032** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1033file names.
1034
424d8b44 1035+++
a933dad1
DL
1036** Tooltips.
1037
1038Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1039mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1040turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1041
1042Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1043variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1044the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1045tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1046
424d8b44 1047+++
a933dad1
DL
1048** Customize changes
1049
1050*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1051`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1052cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1053
1054*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1055Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1056default).
1057
0ae51efb
GM
1058*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1059between custom options. Example:
1060
1061 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1062 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1063 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1064 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1065 :group 'mule
1066 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1067 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1068
1069This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1070current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1071first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1072
a933dad1
DL
1073** New features in evaluation commands
1074
5e03eb84 1075*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1076modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1077print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1078customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1079eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1080
5e03eb84
GM
1081*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1082code when called with a prefix argument.
1083
ead53494
GM
1084** Ispell changes
1085
37d8a691 1086+++
bbe15990
EZ
1087*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1088transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1089spell-checks the current buffer.
1090
37d8a691 1091+++
385ff9e3
GM
1092*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1093added.
1094
1095*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1096correction is made and re-checked.
1097
74ec6045 1098*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1099
1100*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1101cases.
1102
1103*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1104on syntax errors.
1105
1106*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1107end of the buffer.
1108
a933dad1
DL
1109** Dired changes
1110
1111*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1112command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1113is, delete only empty directories.
1114
1115*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1116command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1117copy directories recursively.
1118
f6737cde
GM
1119*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1120in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1121the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1122
2f72fd2f
GM
1123*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1124replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1125directory.
1126
7381ae05
MB
1127*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1128a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1129This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1130will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1131accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1132
e024b101
GM
1133*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1134from ls switches.
1135
60b392a7
MB
1136*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1137of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1138which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1139source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1140
a933dad1
DL
1141** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1142use the -f option when sending mail.
1143
b1c609b1
GM
1144** CC mode changes.
1145
1146Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1147current user setups (although it's believed that these
1148incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1149However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1150back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1151compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1152release.
1153
7972fcfc
GM
1154*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1155This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1156of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1157non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1158want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1159have to bother.
1160
1161Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1162situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1163and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1164If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1165the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1166by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1167
b1c609b1
GM
1168*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1169When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1170variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1171take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1172is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1173settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1174possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1175Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1176
1177By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1178special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1179the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1180of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1181above.
1182
1183Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1184when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1185function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1186call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1187then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1188values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1189only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1190function documentation for more info.
1191
1192The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1193especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1194with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1195intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1196such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1197is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1198configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1199global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1200
1201(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1202
1203**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1204This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1205
1206This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1207variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1208completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1209the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1210empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1211style system.
1212
1213**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1214In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1215c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1216as far as possible.
1217
1218*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1219CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1220surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1221chapter about this in the manual.
1222
1223**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1224The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1225recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1226primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1227adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1228
1229**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1230This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1231c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1232
1233**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1234This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1235
1236It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1237Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1238A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1239inside CC Mode.
1240
1241Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1242causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1243the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1244available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1245cc-mode/).
1246
1247**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1248The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1249specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1250literals.
1251
1252**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1253It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1254prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1255you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1256this function.
1257
1258*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1259It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1260to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1261struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1262Thanks to Eric Eide.
1263
1264*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1265It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1266opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1267
1268**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1269
1270*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1271See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1272better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1273and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1274
1275*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1276previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1277the column specified by comment-column.
1278
1279*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1280In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1281is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1282prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1283contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1284don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1285
1286*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1287instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1288arguments.
1289
1290*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1291
1292*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1293c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1294c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1295variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1296Provan).
1297
1298*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1299
c407c570
GM
1300** Makefile mode changes
1301
1302*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1303
5d94f558 1304*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1305Fontlock mode is active.
1306
87be76f6
GM
1307** Isearch changes
1308
3353ef5a
GM
1309*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1310so that searches can be resumed.
1311
1312*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1313respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1314that started the search.
1315
87be76f6 1316*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1317selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1318
c8a8458a 1319+++
87be76f6
GM
1320*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1321
d35fce81 1322Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1323`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1324search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1325before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1326highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1327`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1328
1329The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1330will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1331Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1332using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1333usual snappy response.
1334
1335If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1336matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1337set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1338isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1339
21bc6203 1340+++
35384f06
GM
1341** Changes in sort.el
1342
1343The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1344as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1345new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1346numeric base.
87be76f6 1347
d7b511c4
GM
1348** Changes to Ange-ftp
1349
424d8b44 1350+++
d7b511c4 1351*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1352names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1353sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1354
d7b511c4
GM
1355*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1356ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1357
9d453139
SS
1358*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1359output ^M at the end of lines.
1360
4b9347b3
GM
1361** Shell script mode changes.
1362
1363Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1364derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1365sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1366
79214ddf
FP
1367** Etags changes.
1368
1369*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1370
aca0be23 1371*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1372possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1373{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1374This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1375a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1376
79214ddf
FP
1377*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1378declarations when given the --declarations option.
1379
1380*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1381"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1382
1383*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1384types.
1385
de370c4c 1386*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1387
1388*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1389
1390*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1391are now tagged.
1392
1393*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1394variables are tagged.
1395
1396*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1397
8dc78b52
FP
1398*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1399for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1400
c8d94f86 1401+++
f6737cde
GM
1402** Changes in etags.el
1403
3f6e4b8b
GM
1404*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1405tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1406is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1407
f6737cde
GM
1408*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1409the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1410
1411If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1412FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1413TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1414obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1415
1416TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1417
1418FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1419List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1420
1421A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1422
1423 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1424 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1425 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1426
1427*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1428of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1429
1430*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1431names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1432
0c68ce6f
GM
1433*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1434If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1435/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1436"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1437point will go to the beginning of the file.
1438
424d8b44 1439+++
fbc164de
PE
1440** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1441and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1442LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1443
c3eb1f10 1444+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1445** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1446Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14478859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1448GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14498859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1450releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1451(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1452
424d8b44 1453+++
163ea954 1454** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1455remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1456appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1457
1458** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1459
424d8b44 1460+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1461** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1462
6ab8d72d 1463+++
f6499c03 1464** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1465containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1466expression from that list, are not checked.
1467
5d94f558
SS
1468** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1469When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1470and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1471the buffer, just like for the local files.
1472
dc28878c
GM
1473** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1474
df8a9f78 1475+++
95931eb1
GM
1476** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1477displays local abbrevs, only.
1478
54baed30
GM
1479** VC Changes
1480
1481VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1482easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1483Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1484to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1485changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1486`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1487version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1488each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1489file is registered in that backend.
1490
1491When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1492backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1493directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1494master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1495the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1496As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1497
1498The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1499still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1500RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1501vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1502where it doesn't make sense.)
1503
1504The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1505obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1506`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1507
1508*** General Changes
1509
1510The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1511checks are always done now.
1512
327652be 1513VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1514operations.
1515
c286608e
SM
1516`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1517`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1518`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1519
22933be8
AS
1520The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1521first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1522current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1523the working file (``merge news'').
1524
1525The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1526(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1527downwards.
1528
1529*** Multiple Backends
1530
1531VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1532useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1533repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1534commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1535local RCS archives.
1536
1537To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1538should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1539backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1540`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1541
1542If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1543it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1544Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1545by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1546backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1547VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1548happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1549from the more remote backend.
1550
1551If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1552another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1553any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1554pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1555
1556After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1557changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1558local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1559buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1560
54baed30
GM
1561*** Changes for CVS
1562
1563There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1564default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1565remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1566by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1567regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1568that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1569queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1570
22933be8
AS
1571If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1572repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1573revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1574any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1575backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1576number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1577(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1578of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1579the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1580automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1581since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1582name.)
22933be8 1583
54baed30
GM
1584If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1585repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1586If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1587commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1588current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1589entire directory tree.
1590
1591The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1592"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1593is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1594"watched" by other developers.)
1595
22933be8
AS
1596The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1597(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1598an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1599starting at the given directory.
1600
54baed30
GM
1601*** Lisp Changes in VC
1602
1603VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1604add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1605library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1606then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1607a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1608provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1609of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1610you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1611`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1612
a933dad1
DL
1613** New modes and packages
1614
b95b34e5
GM
1615*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1616rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1617shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1618
1619Features are:
1620
1621- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1622 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1623 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1624 | / \
1625
1626- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1627 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1628 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1629 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1630 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1631 you are drawing.
1632
1633- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1634 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1635
1636- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1637 flood-filling.
1638
1639- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1640 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1641 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1642 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1643
b95b34e5
GM
1644- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1645 also do without the mouse.
1646
1647- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1648 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1649 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1650 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1651 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1652
1653- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1654
1655 lines straight-lines
1656 rectangles squares
1657 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1658 ellipses circles
1659 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1660 spray-can setting size for spraying
1661 vaporize line vaporize lines
1662 erase characters erase rectangles
1663
1664 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1665 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1666 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1667 drawing.
1668
1669 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1670 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1671 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1672 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1673
1674- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1675 can be turned off).
1676
4473cdd9
JW
1677+++
1678*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1679implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1680It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1681functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1682history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1683will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1684the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1685rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1686all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1687
ff332647 1688+++
90cbf47e
GM
1689*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1690intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1691typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1692on certain projects.
1693
894ca69e 1694+++
90cbf47e 1695*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1696regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1697
d96d6bb0 1698 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1699
1700will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1701face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1702typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1703Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1704appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1705current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1706corresponding file is read.
1707
424d8b44 1708+++
d96d6bb0 1709*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1710Emacs is idle.
1711
31fc5d15
GM
1712*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1713parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1714
5cb6a58e
SM
1715*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1716package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1717be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1718`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1719comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1720
424d8b44 1721+++
578979ee
GM
1722*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1723facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1724separate Texinfo file.
1725
424d8b44
DL
1726+++
1727*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1728by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1729provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1730`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1731enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1732
424d8b44 1733+++
6abca616
EZ
1734*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1735without invoking external programs.
1736
1737The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1738and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1739`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1740is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1741Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1742
1743The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1744page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1745
719e2c6e 1746+++
5e5dff44
GM
1747*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1748authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1749
1750The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1751the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1752the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1753Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1754even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1755single step.
1756
1757On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1758matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1759probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1760contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1761
424d8b44 1762+++
f7136ee8
GM
1763*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1764unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1765actually modifying content of a buffer.
1766
bbd9b566
GM
1767*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1768PostScript.
1769
1770Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1771
1772The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1773
1774 ; comment (until end of line)
1775 A non-terminal
1776 "C" terminal
1777 ?C? special
1778 $A default non-terminal
1779 $"C" default terminal
1780 $?C? default special
1781 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1782 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1783 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1784 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1785 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1786 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1787 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1788 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1789 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1790 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1791 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1792 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1793 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1794 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1795 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1796
1797Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1798
99453a38
GM
1799*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1800align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1801determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1802example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1803equal signs of assignments.
1804
424d8b44 1805+++
559cee90
DL
1806*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1807paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1808
424d8b44 1809+++
6448a6b3
GM
1810*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1811list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1812buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1813customize the package.
1814
6344985d
GM
1815*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1816
249652b1
GM
1817*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1818replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1819is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1820and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1821not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1822which answers different needs.
1823
424d8b44 1824+++
3476b54a
GM
1825*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1826suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1827expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1828course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1829reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1830to be enabled.
1831
424d8b44 1832+++
8964fec7
SM
1833*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1834containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1835
424d8b44 1836+++
a933dad1
DL
1837*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1838
424d8b44 1839+++
a933dad1
DL
1840*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1841
1842*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1843
8901d1ac
GM
1844Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1845`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1846disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1847`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1848displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1849and background colors.
1850
a933dad1
DL
1851*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1852Pascal) language.
1853
f6499c03 1854+++
a933dad1
DL
1855*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1856the text at point.
1857
1858*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1859
424d8b44 1860+++
8d54eb69
DL
1861*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1862
a933dad1
DL
1863*** whitespace.el ???
1864
ebcfda83
GM
1865*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1866files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1867(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1868interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1869often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1870uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1871codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1872
1873*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1874
1875Here is an example of columns:
1876
1877horse apple bus
1878dog pineapple car EXTRA
1879porcupine strawberry airplane
1880
1881Doing the following settings:
1882
1883 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1884 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1885 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1886 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1887
1888
1889Selecting the lines above and typing:
1890
1891 M-x delimit-columns-region
1892
1893It results:
1894
1895[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1896[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1897[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1898
1899delim-col has the following options:
1900
1901 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1902 before all columns.
1903
1904 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1905 between each column.
1906
1907 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1908 after all columns.
1909
1910 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1911 each column.
1912
1913delim-col has the following commands:
1914
1915 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1916 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1917
424d8b44 1918+++
f507826c 1919*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1920were operated on recently.
1921
1922M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1923
31fc5d15
GM
1924M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1925recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1926
31fc5d15
GM
1927M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1928filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1929file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1930
31fc5d15
GM
1931- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1932- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1933- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1934
31fc5d15
GM
1935The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1936dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1937
8062f458
DL
1938*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1939text.
1940
424d8b44 1941+++
36e24b82 1942*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1943of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1944specific to Message mode.
1945
424d8b44 1946+++
36e24b82
DL
1947*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1948viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1949with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1950
424d8b44 1951+++
aaa659ef
DL
1952*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1953interface to access directory servers using different directory
1954protocols. It has a separate manual.
1955
eee54b0e
DL
1956*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1957for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1958
424d8b44 1959+++
612839b6
GM
1960*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1961
5d94f558 1962*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1963minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1964
399da7e3
DL
1965*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1966with the diary features.
1967
6e417ca5
DL
1968*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1969numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1970
4a27bdfb
GM
1971*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1972Fill mode.
1973
60dd7e0e
DL
1974*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1975Gnus facilities.
1976
dace60cf
JW
1977*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1978facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1979difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1980they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1981
965bc065
DL
1982+++
1983** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1984paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1985
1986+++
1987** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1988to be visited as images.
1989
a933dad1
DL
1990** Withdrawn packages
1991
1992*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1993functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1994
3261c1d8
DL
1995*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1996
1997*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1998
1999\f
01242779
DL
2000* Incompatible Lisp changes
2001
2002There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2003may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2004
2005** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2006`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2007
2008** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2009which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2010may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2011these properties are active.
2012
4dd4cc14 2013** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2014ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2015
2016** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2017buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2018make a difference to some code.
2019
4dd4cc14
DL
2020** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2021operates on the minibuffer.
2022
7c94ccf6
EZ
2023** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2024cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2025different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2026(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2027Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2028character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2029multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2030encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2031reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2032sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2033a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2034the buffer as multibyte characters.
2035
2036Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2037MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2038appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2039
01242779 2040\f
ce75fd23
GM
2041* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2042(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2043
52d89894
GM
2044+++
2045** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2046alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2047
693c4692 2048** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2049
1c14ba45 2050+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2051** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2052deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2053being deleted.
2054
1c14ba45 2055+++
39e776cd
SM
2056** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2057
a18a342d 2058+++
1396138a 2059** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2060If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2061skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2062with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2063C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2064charset.
2065
4fbdfdcf
MB
2066+++
2067** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2068the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2069message.
2070
6a0b0752
MB
2071** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2072expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2073
1c14ba45 2074+++
47e351a3
GM
2075** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2076with the more general `:mask' property.
2077
1c14ba45 2078+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2079** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2080
a2bd77b8
GM
2081** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2082backslash.
2083
424d8b44
DL
2084+++
2085** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2086is running in batch mode. For example,
2087
2088 (message "%s" (read t))
2089
2090will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2091to standard output.
2092
2093+++
2094** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2095`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2096
ead53494
GM
2097** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2098will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2099frame or window.
2100
f6499c03 2101+++
27848c01
GM
2102** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2103were added
2104
2105- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2106
2107Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2108a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2109
2110- Function: remq ELT LIST
2111
2112Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2113comparison is done with `eq'.
2114
1c14ba45 2115+++
27848c01 2116** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2117
b548072f
GM
2118** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2119has been changed.
2120
424d8b44 2121+++
07b14857
KH
2122** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2123without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2124convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2125
1c14ba45 2126+++
9662da0b
GM
2127** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2128or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2129
7fce7efb
DL
2130** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2131function was declared obsolete.
2132
1c14ba45 2133+++
5d94f558 2134** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2135retained as an alias).
2136
f98d3086
SM
2137** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2138It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2139is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2140
87efd256
GM
2141** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2142
39b39373
GM
2143- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2144
2145Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2146omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2147the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2148even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2149minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2150means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2151
67c9a1d2
GM
2152** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2153
2154- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2155
2156Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2157
2158This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2159calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2160argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2161value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2162returned.
2163
2164Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2165if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2166it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2167minibuffer even if it is active.
2168
2169Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2170counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2171too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2172and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2173`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2174entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2175
2176ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2177ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2178ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2179ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2180ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2181If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2182Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2183
ead53494
GM
2184** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2185event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2186argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2187
25fa6deb
GM
2188** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2189call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2190message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2191Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2192
5d94f558 2193** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2194meaning no limit.
2195
5d94f558 2196** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2197coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2198DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2199
9b2999d0
DL
2200+++
2201** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2202list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2203
c286608e
SM
2204** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2205
9b2999d0 2206+++
80c05bd3
DL
2207** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2208buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2209This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2210than replacing the local map.
2211
4bc7a543
DL
2212** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2213after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2214
2215** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2216
f6499c03 2217+++
c286608e
SM
2218** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2219as promised long ago.
f0298744 2220
5d94f558 2221** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2222\f
2223* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2224
2225Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2226--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2227When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2228so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2229
85c75536
MB
2230*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2231buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2232the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2233restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2234
0b8a3a6d
DL
2235*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2236`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2237when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2238multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2239
2240*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2241`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2242contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2243
2244*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2245changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2246[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2247regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2248the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2249extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2250bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2251eight-bit-graphic.
2252
2253** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2254
2255A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2256a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2257character set as previously.
2258
2259*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2260They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2261modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2262
2263CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2264characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2265range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2266case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2267
2268FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2269name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2270
2271*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2272registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2273"fontset-default".
2274
2275*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2276argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2277
2278** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2279composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2280buffers and strings.
2281
2282*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2283character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2284code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2285have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2286composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2287composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2288The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2289also been deleted.
2290
2291*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2292specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2293`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2294
2295*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2296MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2297composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2298may differ between buffer and string text.
2299
2300*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2301COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2302
2303*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2304directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2305Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2306`composition' from STRING.
2307
2308*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2309a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2310
2311*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2312obsolete.
2313
965bc065 2314** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2315`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2316for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2317U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2318
2319** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2320`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2321X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2322
2323+++
2324** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2325are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23260xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2327
399da7e3 2328+++
f0124b4a
DL
2329** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2330that offset in the file before writing.
2331
f98d3086
SM
2332** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2333compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2334
612839b6
GM
2335** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2336`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2337from which the command was issued.
2338
2339** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2340`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2341`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2342additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2343operate on.
2344
271b4185
GM
2345** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2346to `window-buffer-height'.
2347
2348- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2349
2350Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2351The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2352lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2353
2354Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2355respectively.
2356
2357If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2358COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2359
2360The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2361obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2362on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2363
2364Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2365buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2366possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2367is currently displayed in some window.
2368
3c30cb6e
DL
2369** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2370argument function's results.
2371
62f20204
GM
2372** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2373signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2374
c0510d27 2375** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2376header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2377
2378** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2379ignores differences in case and text representation.
2380
2381** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2382cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2383as follows:
2384
2385 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2386 nil don't display a cursor
2387 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2388 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2389 others display a box cursor.
2390
9a0dd3dc
GM
2391** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2392an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2393defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2394set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2395
d7b511c4 2396** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2397specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2398the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2399text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2400
2401Example:
2402
2403 (string-to-syntax "()")
2404 => (4 . 41)
2405
1fa28578
GM
2406** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2407other than 10.
2408
2409*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2410INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2411
5d94f558 2412 #b1111
1fa28578 2413 => 15
5d94f558 2414 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2415 => -15
2416
2417*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2418
5d94f558 2419 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2420 => 438
2421
2422*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2423
5d94f558 2424 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2425 => 48815
2426
2427*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2428
5d94f558 2429 #2R-111
1fa28578 2430 => -7
5d94f558 2431 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2432 => 267
2433
3d4ff2dd 2434** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2435the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2436and isn't a string.
2437
3d4ff2dd
GM
2438** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2439a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2440value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2441not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2442
16ce590d
DL
2443+++
2444** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2445
73825616 2446** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2447for a regexp in a string.
2448
2449** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2450`mouse-position-function'.
2451
723e779c
GM
2452** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2453that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2454
d1e103b2
GM
2455** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2456Keywords are now always considered constants.
2457
31047e0d
DL
2458+++
2459** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2460returns it.
2461
7a85e4df
GM
2462** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2463returned by function `recent-keys'.
2464
02b14400
RS
2465+++
2466** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2467can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2468Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2469etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2470mode.
404fa7d6 2471
02b14400 2472+++
8964fec7
SM
2473** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2474and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2475
02b14400
RS
2476+++
2477** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2478has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2479function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2480returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2481been performed."
2482
2483When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2484and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2485hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2486then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2487
02b14400 2488+++
81da8b32
GM
2489** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2490In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2491and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2492
02b14400 2493+++
9e207b90
GM
2494** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2495with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2496specified table.
2497
2498 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2499
2500Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2501TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2502saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2503what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2504
02b14400 2505+++
d7f89643 2506** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2507Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2508Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2509corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2510Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2511
02b14400 2512+++
dde9e75a
GM
2513** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2514removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2515
02b14400 2516+++
9da30515
GM
2517** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2518instead of being optional.
2519
02b14400 2520+++
d20679eb
GM
2521** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2522modify read-only text.
2523
02b14400 2524+++
fbc164de
PE
2525** New functions and variables for locales.
2526
2527The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2528decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2529time functions like strftime. The new variables
2530`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2531locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2532
2533The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2534environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2535the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2536environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2537not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2538`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2539`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2540
02b14400 2541+++
863476d1
SM
2542** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2543To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2544modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2545start sequences.
2546
02b14400 2547+++
ef6d912c
GM
2548** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2549because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2550
02b14400 2551+++
a933dad1
DL
2552** New function `propertize'
2553
2554The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2555strings with text properties.
2556
2557- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2558
2559Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2560by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2561PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2562specified value of that property. Example:
2563
2564 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2565
2566+++
2567** push and pop macros.
2568
02b14400
RS
2569Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2570are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2571as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2572
2573(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2574(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2575 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2576
02b14400
RS
2577** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2578
6c7fd5aa
RS
2579Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2580are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2581
2582(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2583 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2584 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2585 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2586
2587(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2588 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2589 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2590 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2591
a933dad1 2592+++
6c083b4c
GM
2593** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2594[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2595class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2596or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2597
2598[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2599[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2600[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2601[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2602[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2603 space, and DEL.
2604[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2605 and DEL.
2606[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2607 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2608 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2609[:alpha:] matches letters.
2610 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2611 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2612[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2613[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2614[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2615[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2616 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2617 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2618[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2619[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2620[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2621
2622+++
2623** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2624
2625The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2626
2627- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2628
2629The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2630are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2631
2632:test TEST
2633
2634TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2635Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2636it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2637
2638:size SIZE
2639
2640SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2641many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2642
2643:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2644
2645REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2646full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2647size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
26481.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2649old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2650
2651:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2652
2653THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2654hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2655(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2656
2657:weakness WEAK
2658
b548072f
GM
2659WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2660`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2661`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2662collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2663outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2664
2665- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2666
2667Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2668
2669- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2670
2671Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2672
2673- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2674
2675Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2676values are shared.
2677
2678- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2679
2680Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2681
2682- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2683
2684Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2685
2686- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2687
2688Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2689
2690- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2691
2692Returns the size of TABLE.
2693
d96d6bb0 2694- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2695
2696Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2697
2698- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2699
2700Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2701
2702- Function: clrhash TABLE
2703
2704Clear TABLE.
2705
2706- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2707
2708Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2709not found.
2710
79214ddf 2711- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2712
2713Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2714another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2715
2716- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2717
2718Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2719
2720- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2721
2722Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2723arguments KEY and VALUE.
2724
2725- Function: sxhash OBJ
2726
2727Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2728
2729- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2730
2731Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2732a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2733comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2734and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2735of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2736
2737TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2738
2739HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2740code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2741integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2742
2743Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2744be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2745
2746 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2747 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2748
2749 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2750 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2751
79214ddf 2752 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2753 'case-fold-string-hash))
2754
2755 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2756
2757+++
2758** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2759
2760It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2761circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2762a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2763
2764+++
2765** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2766
2767If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2768#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2769
a933dad1
DL
2770+++
2771** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2772t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2773specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2774is too short to reach that column.
2775
2776+++
2777** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2778now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2779after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2780two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2781
2782If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2783perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2784and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2785
2786+++
2787** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2788to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2789
2790+++
2791** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2792calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2793
2794+++
2795** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2796directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2797small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2798small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2799temporary-file-directory instead.
2800
2801+++
2802** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2803the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2804`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2805hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2806
2807+++
2808** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2809elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2810
2811+++
2812** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2813
2814make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2815creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2816ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2817
2818+++
2819** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2820
2821The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2822on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2823is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2824never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2825ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2826overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2827
2828If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2829that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2830to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2831The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2832
2833+++
2834** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2835
2836Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2837If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2838ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2839result string.
2840
2841Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2842string where arguments appear in the result string.
2843
2844Example:
2845
2846 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2847 (s2 "world"))
2848 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2849 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2850 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2851
2852results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2853
2854+++
2855** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2856
2857Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2858The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2859argument in it.
2860
2861 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2862 (arg "world"))
2863 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2864 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2865 (message msg arg))
2866
2867+++
2868** Sound support
2869
2870Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2871(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2872
2873Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2874(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2875to enable sound support.
2876
2877Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2878list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2879when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2880functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2881sound to play, before playing the sound.
2882
2883The following sound properties are supported:
2884
2885- `:file FILE'
2886
2887FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2888searched relative to `data-directory'.
2889
6fb40beb
GM
2890- `:data DATA'
2891
2892DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2893may be present, but not both.
2894
a933dad1
DL
2895- `:volume VOLUME'
2896
2897VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28980..1. This property is optional.
2899
01242779
DL
2900- `:device DEVICE'
2901
2902DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2903sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2904
a933dad1
DL
2905Other properties are ignored.
2906
01242779
DL
2907An alternative interface is called as
2908(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2909
a933dad1 2910** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2911
9b2999d0 2912+++
356673d4
DL
2913** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2914a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2915
2916** Changes to garbage collection
2917
2918*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2919of live and free strings.
2920
2921*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2922strings that have been consed so far.
2923
a933dad1 2924\f
04545643
GM
2925* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2926Lisp Manual
2927
f7eb32aa 2928+++
a299a6f0
GM
2929** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2930mini-windows.
2931
9b2999d0 2932+++
a299a6f0 2933** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2934If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2935considered visible.
2936
a299a6f0 2937** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2938
9a8d84ca
DL
2939+++
2940** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2941
9b2999d0 2942+++
2c69ced2
GM
2943** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2944image.
2945
2946- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2947
2948Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2949
2950SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2951measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2952character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2953font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2954FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2955
9b2999d0 2956+++
ebb8f116
GM
2957** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2958has a mask bitmap.
2959
2960- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2961
2962Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2963FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2964or omitted means use the selected frame.
2965
f6499c03 2966+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2967** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2968satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2969
2970+++
2971** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2972optional.
2973
f6499c03
DL
2974+++
2975** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2976below).
04545643
GM
2977
2978\f
a933dad1
DL
2979* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2980
2981Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2982--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2983When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2984so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2985
f6d3257b
GM
2986** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2987to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2988
2989Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2990text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2991is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2992your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2993laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2994just display it black instead.
2995
2996This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2997a line like
2998
2999 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3000
3001in your `.emacs'.
3002
a933dad1
DL
3003** New face implementation.
3004
3005Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3006font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3007
3008+++
3009*** New faces.
3010
3011Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3012
3013 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3014
a933dad1
DL
3015 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3016 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3017
a933dad1 3018 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3019
a933dad1 3020 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3021
a933dad1 3022 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3023
a933dad1 3024 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3025
a933dad1
DL
3026 7. Background color.
3027
3028 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3029
3030 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3031
3032 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3033
3034 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3035
3036 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3037 color.
3038
3039 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3040 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3041
3042Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3043same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3044frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3045faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3046with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3047attributes mentioned above.
3048
3049There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3050definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3051created frames.
79214ddf 3052
a933dad1
DL
3053A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3054have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3055`fully-specified'.
3056
3057+++
3058*** Face merging.
3059
3060The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3061combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3062aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3063properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3064that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3065results in a fully-specified face.
3066
3067+++
3068*** Face realization.
3069
3070After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3071merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3072realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3073available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3074face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3075cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3076
3077Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3078character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3079for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3080charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3081
3082Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3083specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3084being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3085the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3086statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3087
3088In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3089`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30900x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3091the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3092initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3093Emacs.
3094
3095Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3096`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3097registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3098with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3099
a7c13351 3100+++
a933dad1
DL
3101**** Clearing face caches.
3102
3103The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3104on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3105unused fonts.
3106
3107+++
3108*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3109
a933dad1
DL
3110Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3111given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3112for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3113
3114If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3115pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3116family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3117property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3118an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3119
3120Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3121against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3122match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3123
3124Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3125
3126The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3127attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3128face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3129names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3130that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3131width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3132to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3133
52d89894
GM
3134Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3135alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3136doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3137specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3138
3139+++
3140**** Scalable fonts
3141
3142Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3143since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3144servers.
3145
3146To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3147`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3148scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3149Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3150scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3151that list. Example:
3152
3153 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3154
3155allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3156
3157+++
3158*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3159
3160- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3161
3162Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3163is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3164string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3165
3166If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3167the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3168FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3169POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3170SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3171These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3172if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3173REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3174the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3175of the face font sort order.
3176
79214ddf 3177- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3178
3179Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3180omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3181(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3182non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3183
3184- Variable: font-list-limit
3185
3186Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3187won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3188matching font. The default is currently 100.
3189
3190+++
3191*** Setting face attributes.
3192
3193For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3194with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3195implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3196`face-attribute'.
3197
3198Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3199symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3200
3201The following attributes are recognized:
3202
3203`:family'
3204
3205VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3206or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3207and `?' are allowed.
3208
3209`:width'
3210
3211VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3212It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3213`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3214`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3215
3216`:height'
3217
787345ff
MB
3218VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3219in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3220scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3221height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3222
3223`:weight'
3224
3225VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3226symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3227`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3228
3229`:slant'
3230
3231VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3232symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3233`reverse-oblique'.
3234
3235`:foreground', `:background'
3236
3237VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3238
3239`:underline'
3240
3241VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3242VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3243a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3244don't underline.
3245
3246`:overline'
3247
3248VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3249VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3250string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3251overline.
3252
3253`:strike-through'
3254
3255VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3256striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3257face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3258is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3259
3260`:box'
3261
3262VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3263around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3264VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3265of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3266and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3267VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3268:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3269the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3270specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3271defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3272the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3273color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3274should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3275like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3276that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3277the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3278box.
3279
3280`:inverse-video'
3281
3282VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3283inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3284
3285`:stipple'
3286
3287If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3288The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3289searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3290HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3291is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3292explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3293
3294For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3295and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3296
3297`:font'
3298
3299Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3300XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3301is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3302versions of Emacs.
3303
3304For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3305be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3306must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3307
3308Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3309`defface'.
3310
787345ff
MB
3311`:inherit'
3312
3313VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3314of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3315like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3316
a933dad1
DL
3317*** Face attributes and X resources
3318
3319The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3320from X resources:
3321
3322 Face attribute X resource class
3323-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3324 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3325 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3326 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3327 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3328 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3329 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3330 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3331 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3332 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3333 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3334 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3335 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3336 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3337 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3338 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3339 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3340 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3341 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3342 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3343
3344+++
3345*** Text property `face'.
3346
3347The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3348specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3349specification can be
3350
33511. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3352
33532. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3354 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3355 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3356 for face attribute names.
3357
33583. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3359 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3360 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3361
3362+++
3363** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3364
acf3ecb7
EZ
3365The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3366on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3367the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3368default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3369`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3370used to clear the mapping table.
3371
acf3ecb7
EZ
3372** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3373
3374The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3375and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3376type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3377color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3378display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3379old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3380`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3381compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3382should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3383modify their color-related behavior.
3384
3385The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3386any frame type.
3387
8a5719f0
EZ
3388** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3389
3390The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3391`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3392`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3393`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3394`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3395`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3396display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3397the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3398platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3399
a933dad1
DL
3400+++
3401** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3402
463cac2d 3403This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3404To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3405the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3406`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3407
3408The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3409end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3410Otherwise, it returns zero.
3411
463cac2d
GM
3412** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3413
3414There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3415buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3416property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3417
9a9dfda8 3418Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3419forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3420to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3421not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3422commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3423boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3424`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3425functions.
463cac2d
GM
3426
3427Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3428a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3429editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3430
9a9dfda8
GM
3431The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3432
59927f88 3433- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3434
3435Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3436
9a9dfda8
GM
3437A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3438If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3439constrained position if that is is different.
3440
3441If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3442positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3443ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3444constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3445as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3446is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3447fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3448the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3449also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3450
3451If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3452NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3453unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3454C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3455only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3456
59927f88
MB
3457If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3458a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3459
3460Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3461
3462- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3463
59927f88 3464Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3465A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3466If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3467
3468- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3469
3470Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3471A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3472If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3473If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3474field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3475
3476- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3477
3478Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3479A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3480If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3481If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3482then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3483
3484- Function: field-string &optional POS
3485
3486Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3487A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3488If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3489
3490- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3491
3492Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3493A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3494If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3495
a933dad1
DL
3496+++
3497** Image support.
3498
3499Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3500strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3501(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3502replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3503
3504If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3505`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3506AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3507window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3508area.
3509
3510IMAGE is an image specification.
3511
3512*** Image specifications
3513
3514Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3515is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3516specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3517symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3518described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3519
3520The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3521
3522`:ascent ASCENT'
3523
576da55d
GM
3524ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3525If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3526to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3527
3528If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3529image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3530
5d94f558 3531If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3532centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3533of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3534overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3535
3536`:margin MARGIN'
3537
79214ddf 3538MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3539margin around the image. Default is 0.
3540
3541`:relief RELIEF'
3542
3543RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3544around an image.
3545
3546`:algorithm ALGO'
3547
47e351a3
GM
3548Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3549
3550ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3551edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3552
3553ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3554apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3555nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3556position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3557around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3558neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3559transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3560x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3561below.
3562
3563 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3564 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3565 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3566
3567The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3568resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3569multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3570of the factors' absolute values.
3571
327652be 3572Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3573
47e351a3
GM
3574 (1 0 0
3575 0 0 0
3576 9 9 -1)
3577
3578Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3579
3580 ( 2 -1 0
3581 -1 0 1
3582 0 1 -2)
3583
ba9eeda1
GM
3584ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3585``disabled''.
3586
47e351a3
GM
3587`:mask MASK'
3588
3589If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3590the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3591image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3592background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3593image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3594the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3595GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3596image.
a933dad1 3597
47e351a3
GM
3598If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3599in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3600`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3601
3602`:file FILE'
3603
3604Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3605search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3606building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3607may be present in the image specification.
3608
518df5c4
GM
3609`:data DATA'
3610
3611Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3612supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3613present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3614support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3615
a933dad1
DL
3616*** Supported image types
3617
b246b1f6 3618**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3619
3620XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3621properties supported are
3622
3623`:foreground FG'
3624
3625FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3626is the frame's foreground.
3627
46c5af7f 3628`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3629
3630BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3631the frame's background color.
3632
3633XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3634case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3635instead of a `:file' property.
3636
3637`:width WIDTH'
3638
3639WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3640
3641`:height HEIGHT'
3642
3643HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3644
3645`:data DATA'
3646
3647DATA must be either
3648
3649 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3650 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3651
3652 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3653
3654 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3655 bitmap.
3656
c76e04a8
GM
3657 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3658 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3659 in the file.
3660
a933dad1
DL
3661**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3662
3663XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3664`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3665found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3666`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3667
3668Additional image properties supported are:
3669
3670`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3671
3672SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3673name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3674name.
3675
3676XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3677add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3678
a933dad1
DL
3679The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3680to display compressed images.
3681
3682**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3683
3684PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3685mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3686mono images are
3687
3688`:foreground FG'
3689
3690FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3691is the frame's foreground.
3692
3693`:background FG'
3694
3695BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3696the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3697
3698**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3699
3700Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3701package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3702are:
3703
a933dad1
DL
3704**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3705
3706Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3707package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3708properties defined.
3709
3710**** GIF, image type `gif'
3711
3712Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3713`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3714
3715Additional image properties supported are:
3716
3717`:index INDEX'
3718
3719INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3720multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3721
3722This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3723For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3724at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3725every 0.1 seconds.
3726
3727(defun show-anim (file max)
3728 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3729 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3730
3731(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3732 (when (= idx max)
3733 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3734 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3735 (save-excursion
3736 (set-buffer buffer)
3737 (goto-char (point-min))
3738 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3739 (insert-image img "x"))
3740 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3741
3742**** PNG, image type `png'
3743
3744Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3745package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3746properties defined.
3747
3748**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3749
3750Additional image properties supported are:
3751
3752`:pt-width WIDTH'
3753
3754WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3755integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3756
3757`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3758
3759HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3760must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3761
3762`:bounding-box BOX'
3763
3764BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3765the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3766files. This is an required property.
3767
3768Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3769lisp/gs.el.
3770
3771*** Lisp interface.
3772
79214ddf
FP
3773The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3774which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3775
3776Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3777they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3778The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3779manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3780images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3781
3782*** Simplified image API, image.el
3783
3784The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3785creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3786can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3787define an image based on available image types. The functions
3788`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3789buffer.
3790
3791+++
3792** Display margins.
3793
3794Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3795and images.
3796
3797To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3798`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3799`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3800obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3801`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3802the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3803of the display margins.
3804
3805You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3806containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3807one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3808string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3809in this file).
3810
3811+++
3812** Help display
3813
3814Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3815moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3816`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3817that have a `help-echo' property.
3818
9662da0b 3819If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3820is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3821the window in which the help was found.
3822
3823If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3824`help-echo' text property was found.
3825
3826If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3827POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3828
3829If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3830the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3831mouse.
d5aa31d8 3832
9662da0b
GM
3833If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3834string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3835
3836For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3837determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3838property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3839For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3840used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3841
3842The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3843the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3844causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3845
3846+++
3847** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3848
3849The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3850This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3851
3852The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3853scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3854The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3855scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3856used.
3857
79214ddf
FP
3858 (global-set-key [A-down]
3859 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3860 (interactive)
79214ddf 3861 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3862 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3863 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3864 #'(lambda ()
3865 (interactive)
79214ddf 3866 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3867 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3868
3869+++
3870** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3871
3872Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3873when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3874variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3875is called with one argument, POS.
3876
3877At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3878characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3879as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3880property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3881`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3882
3883+++
3884** Tool bar support.
3885
3886Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3887parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3888controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3889suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3890`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3891automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3892
3893*** Tool bar item definitions
3894
3895Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3896`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3897where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3898
a933dad1
DL
3899CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3900evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3901the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3902property (see below).
79214ddf 3903
a933dad1
DL
3904BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3905binding are currently ignored.
3906
3907The following properties are recognized:
3908
3909`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3910
a933dad1
DL
3911FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3912or disabled.
79214ddf 3913
a933dad1 3914`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3915
a933dad1 3916FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3917
a933dad1
DL
3918`:filter FUNCTION'
3919
3920FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3921FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3922used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3923
a933dad1
DL
3924`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3925
3926TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3927and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3928
a933dad1
DL
3929`:image IMAGES'
3930
3931IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3932image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3933meaning of each of the four elements:
3934
3935 Index Use when item is
3936 ----------------------------------------
3937 0 enabled and selected
3938 1 enabled and deselected
3939 2 disabled and selected
3940 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3941
4ba7246d
GM
3942If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3943algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3944
a933dad1 3945`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3946
a933dad1
DL
3947Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3948is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3949
dab96841 3950The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3951toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3952to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3953menu bar.
dab96841 3954
8628686a
DL
3955The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3956dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3957buffer-locally to override the global map.
3958
a933dad1
DL
3959*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3960
3961If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3962resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3963than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3964
79214ddf 3965If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3966raised when the mouse moves over them.
3967
3968You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3969`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3970pixels. Default is 1.
3971
3972You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3973`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3974
3975*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3976
3977You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3978a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3979
3980 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3981 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3982 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3983
3984is the original tool bar item definition, then
3985
3986 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3987
3988makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3989item.
3990
3991** Mode line changes.
3992
3993+++
3994*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3995
3996The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3997that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3998a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3999
40001. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4001a `local-map' text property.
4002
40032. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4004that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4005
40063. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4007is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4008`local-map' property.
4009
4010The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4011properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4012example.
4013
54522c9f
GM
4014*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4015evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4016
a933dad1
DL
4017+++
4018*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4019variable mode-line-format to nil.
4020
4021+++
4022*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4023
4024This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4025`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4026completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4027`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4028line.
4029
4030The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4031`header-line'.
4032
4033The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4034position in the header-line.
4035
4036+++
4037** Text property `display'
4038
623a0aae
GM
4039The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4040replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4041also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4042the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4043below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4044
623a0aae
GM
4045*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4046
4047To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4048text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4049
4050If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4051marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4052the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4053is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4054simpler form STRING as property value.
4055
a933dad1
DL
4056*** Variable width and height spaces
4057
4058To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4059specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4060`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4061area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4062marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4063displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4064simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4065
4066The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4067PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4068properties described below.
4069
4070The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4071characters having the `display' property.
4072
4073- :width WIDTH
4074
4075Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4076character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4077
4078- :relative-width FACTOR
4079
4080Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4081first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4082same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4083width of that character by FACTOR.
4084
4085- :align-to HPOS
4086
4087Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4088value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4089
4090Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4091
4092- :height HEIGHT
4093
4094Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4095normal line height.
4096
4097- :relative-height FACTOR
4098
4099The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4100of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4101
4102- :ascent ASCENT
4103
4104Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4105used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4106baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4107equal to 100.
4108
4109You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4110
4111*** Images
4112
4113A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4114. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4115in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4116their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4117the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4118`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4119area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4120the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4121as display specification.
4122
4123*** Other display properties
4124
c9e73000 4125- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4126
4127Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4128should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4129integer or float.
4130
c9e73000 4131- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4132
4133Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4134
4135If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4136means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4137the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4138``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4139a font is available counts as a step.
4140
4141If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4142as tall as the frame's default font.
4143
4144If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4145height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4146
4147Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4148`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4149
c9e73000 4150- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4151
4152FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4153font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4154raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4155amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4156`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4157
4158*** Conditional display properties
4159
4160All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4161has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4162applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4163During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4164the text having the `display' property.
4165
4166The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4167`(:when t SPEC)'.
4168
4169+++
4170** New menu separator types.
4171
4172Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4173item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4174treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4175to specify other menu separator types.
4176
4177- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4178
4179No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4180separator occurs.
4181
4182- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4183
4184A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4185
4186- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4187
4188A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4189
4190- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4191
4192A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4193
4194- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4195
4196A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4197
4198- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4199
4200A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4201displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4202
4203- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4204
4205A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4206
4207- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4208
4209A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4210
4211- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4212
4213A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4214
4215- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4216
4217Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4218
4219- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4220
4221Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4222
4223- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4224
4225Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4226
4227- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4228
4229Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4230
4231Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4232the corresponding single-line separators.
4233
4234+++
4235** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4236
4237The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4238`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4239Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4240that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4241default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4242default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4243default foreground is black.
4244
4245The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4246(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4247`ScrollBarBackground').
4248
4249Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4250settings for scroll bar colors.
4251
4252+++
4253** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4254display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4255
4256---
4257** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4258starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4259on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4260line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4261the original window start.
4262
4263---
4264** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4265`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4266now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4267
4268+++
4269** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4270
4271A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4272`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4273windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4274other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4275
4276The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4277fixed-width and fixed-height.
4278
4279 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4280
4281A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4282fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4283window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4284change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4285temporarily to nil, for example
4286
4287 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4288 (enlarge-window 10))
4289
79214ddf 4290Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4291or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4292
4293** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4294terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4295to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4296overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4297horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4298support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4299
3787e12e 4300
79dfd2cd 4301\f
3787e12e
GM
4302* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4303
4304** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4305input.
4306
4307** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4308
4309** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4310
4311** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4312only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4313exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4314(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4315(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4316
4317** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4318been added.
4319
79dfd2cd 4320\f
3787e12e
GM
4321* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4322
4323** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4324
79dfd2cd 4325\f
3787e12e
GM
4326* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4327
4328** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4329M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4330\f
4331* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4332
4333** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4334
4335You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4336Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4337`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4338
4339If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4340is the one that is used.
4341
4342** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4343the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4344Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4345separate from the command's regular output.
4346Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4347says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4348In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4349the buffer name.
4350
4351When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4352output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4353it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4354cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4355
4356** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4357the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4358is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4359created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4360
4361** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4362example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4363match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4364quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4365
4366** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4367now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4368if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4369they never ignore case.
4370
4371** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4372under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4373applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4374of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4375just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4376convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4377part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4378
4379If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4380the same format that was used in the file before.
4381
4382You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4383`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4384
4385** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4386renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4387This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4388
4389** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4390The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4391buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4392your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4393is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4394end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4395Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4396
4397The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4398eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4399control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4400format. You can now customize these variables.
4401
4402** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4403filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4404filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4405enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4406
4407** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4408in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4409windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4410
4411** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4412dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4413doesn't have any effect.
4414
4415** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4416not one per buffer.
4417
4418** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4419use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4420 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4421
4422** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4423To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4424`auto-show-mode' command.
4425
4426** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4427avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4428versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4429choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4430occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4431
4432** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4433cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4434
4435** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4436character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4437feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4438
4439** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4440the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4441interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4442and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4443
4444** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4445
4446The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4447that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4448one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4449codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4450set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4451
4452Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4453from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4454
4455IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4456equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4457a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4458`?' on other systems.
4459
4460IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4461feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4462Unix.
4463
4464Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4465current codepage when it starts.
4466
4467** Mail changes
4468
4469*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4470`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4471appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4472non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4473MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4474headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4475latin-1:
4476
4477 MIME-version: 1.0
4478 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4479 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4480
4481*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4482default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4483default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4484sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4485buffer-file-coding-system.
4486
4487You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4488sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4489mail.
4490
4491*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4492if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4493Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4494list of possible coding systems.
4495
4496** CC Mode changes
4497
4498*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4499modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4500longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4501docstring for details.
4502
4503*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4504symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4505found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4506prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4507lineup functions use this feature currently.
4508
4509*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4510"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4511
4512*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4513"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4514
4515*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4516from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4517symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4518c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4519anonymous classes.
4520
4521*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4522syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4523
4524*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4525inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4526support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4527function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4528
4529*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4530(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4531brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4532c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4533(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4534
4535*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4536
4537*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4538
4539*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4540for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4541
4542*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4543
4544*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4545associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4546This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4547circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4548class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4549
4550** Gnus changes.
4551
4552*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4553added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4554Gnus manual for the full story.
4555
4556*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4557before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4558group, which is created automatically.
4559
4560*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4561values.
4562
4563*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4564
4565*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4566outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4567
4568*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4569`C-u C-c C-c'.
4570
4571*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4572
4573*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4574re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4575
4576*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4577
4578*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4579Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4580
4581*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4582`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4583
4584*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4585control over simplification.
4586
4587*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4588
4589*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4590limit.
4591
4592*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4593
4594*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4595
4596*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4597If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4598rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4599
4600*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4601`a' forces normal posting method.
4602
4603*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4604-- `W d'.
4605
4606*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4607to a non-nil value.
4608
4609*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4610where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4611
4612*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4613has been added.
4614
4615*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4616
4617*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4618
4619*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4620`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4621
4622*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4623`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4624
4625*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4626
4627*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4628been added.
4629
4630*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4631`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4632
4633*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4634updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4635
4636*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4637
4638*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4639
4640*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4641
4642** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4643
4644*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4645options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4646nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4647
4648*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4649TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4650of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4651TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4652can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4653
4654*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4655All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4656but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4657the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4658
4659*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4660the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4661buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4662mismatch.
4663
4664** Changes to RefTeX mode
4665
4666*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4667file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4668
4669*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4670lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4671characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4672removed from the label.
4673
4674*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4675a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4676
4677*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4678customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4679
4680*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4681`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4682expressions.
4683
4684*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4685
4686** New/deleted modes and packages
4687
4688*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4689SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4690
4691*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4692editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4693SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4694
4695*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4696changes with a special face.
4697
4698*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4699this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4700Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4701\f
4702* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4703
4704** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4705This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4706conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4707and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4708check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4709
4710The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4711Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4712distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4713
4714** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4715MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4716controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4717directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4718Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4719on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4720string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4721program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4722printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4723
4724** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4725output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4726available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4727input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4728temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4729program.
4730
4731An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4732and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4733programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4734automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4735as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4736ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4737
4738** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4739a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4740MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4741was not documented clearly before.
4742
4743** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4744This includes Tetris and Snake.
4745\f
4746* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4747
4748** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4749return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4750They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4751meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4752
4753** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4754WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4755and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4756
4757** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4758
4759*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4760It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4761
4762*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4763the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4764integers.
4765
4766** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4767files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4768arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4769file names and attributes are returned.
4770
4771** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4772sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4773accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4774It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4775returns the result.
4776
4777** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4778to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4779
4780** New functions for base64 conversion:
4781
4782The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4783into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4784performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4785optionally.
4786
4787Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4788job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4789
4790**
4791The new function process-running-child-p
4792will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4793terminal to its own child process.
4794
4795** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4796when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4797to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4798itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4799
4800** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4801be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4802
4803** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4804:included is an alias for :visible.
4805
4806easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4807easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4808to move or copy menu entries.
4809
4810** Multibyte editing changes
4811
4812*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4813an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4814make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4815work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4816char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4817 (setq char (sref str idx)
4818 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4819The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4820
4821If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4822(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4823 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4824
4825*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4826region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4827deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4828
4829 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4830
4831This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4832across the boundary.
4833
4834*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4835`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4836 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4837 contains 8-bit characters.
4838 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4839 contains invalid characters.
4840
4841*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4842text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4843preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4844text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4845way.
4846
4847*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4848If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4849end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4850prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4851
4852*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4853compose Thai characters in a string.
4854
4855** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4856argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4857for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4858menus should always use the third argument.
4859
4860** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4861read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4862arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4863input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4864
4865** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4866of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4867programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4868inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4869
4870** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4871the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4872returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4873echo area contents.
4874
4875 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4876
4877** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4878NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4879requested feature cannot be loaded.
4880
4881** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4882foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4883means to clear out that attribute.
4884
4885** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4886gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4887
4888** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4889read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4890unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4891end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4892
4893** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4894the gap of the current buffer.
4895
4896** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4897to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4898current buffer.
4899
4900** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4901facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4902These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4903it back in after any modifications have been made.
4904\f
4905* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4906
4907** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4908the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4909/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4910directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4911subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4912
4913Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4914names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4915Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4916which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4917these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4918
4919Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4920starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4921time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4922
4923This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4924Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4925to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4926subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4927`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4928results.
4929
4930** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4931GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4932that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4933fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4934\f
4935* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4936
4937** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4938including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4939it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4940perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4941
4942** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4943specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4944region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4945further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4946command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4947within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4948are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4949region.
4950
4951In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4952selective undo.
4953
4954** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4955unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4956buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4957effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4958Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4959
4960The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4961though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4962-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4963load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4964
4965** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4966no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4967enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4968something that most users not do.
4969
4970** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4971operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4972The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4973applications.
4974
4975C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4976pasting operations.
4977
4978** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4979setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4980like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4981printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4982`ps-printer-name'.
4983
4984** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4985minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4986any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4987except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4988incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4989hits a new word.
4990
4991Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4992Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4993to be confused by TeX commands.
4994
4995You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4996correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4997clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4998of various alternative replacements and actions.
4999
5000Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5001the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5002corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5003alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5004flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5005
5006Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5007flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5008
5009** Changes in input method usage.
5010
5011Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5012the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5013respectively.
5014
5015You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5016
5017If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5018of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5019
5020The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5021that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5022
5023 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5024
5025 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5026
5027 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5028 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5029
5030 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5031 given in the following case:
5032 o When you are using a complex input method.
5033 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5034
5035If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5036input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5037and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5038setting it to t is helpful.
5039
5040The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5041
5042In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5043keys:
5044 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5045 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5046 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5047These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5048environment.
5049
5050** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5051names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5052minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5053get
5054
5055 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5056
5057which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5058
5059Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5060Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5061
5062** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5063at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5064its owner and group.
5065
5066** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5067Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5068
5069** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5070contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5071
5072** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5073which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5074in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5075by the left edge of the rectangle.
5076
5077** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5078increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5079C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5080for writing keyboard macros.
5081
5082** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5083files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5084frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5085the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5086additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5087info.
5088
5089** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5090
5091** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5092query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5093contents only.
5094
5095** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5096confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5097the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5098says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5099
5100** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5101non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5102literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5103
5104** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5105now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5106Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5107inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5108
5109** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5110failure if the command produces no output.
5111
5112** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5113manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5114the mouse.
5115
5116** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5117mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5118function and variable names.
5119
5120** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5121reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5122file-coding-system-alist.
5123
5124** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5125t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5126converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5127the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5128according to the current fontset.
5129
5130** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5131
5132The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5133that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5134nonascii-insert-offset.
5135
5136For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5137enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5138nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5139characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5140
5141** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5142an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5143
5144** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5145letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5146
5147** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5148are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5149command keys.
5150
5151** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5152user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5153
5154Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5155user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5156all variables that have documentation.
5157
5158** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5159shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5160that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5161minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5162it should show; the default is 20.
5163
5164Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5165the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5166of your input.
5167
5168** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5169all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5170recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5171argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5172the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5173Newly added options are included as well.
5174
5175If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5176then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5177for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5178
5179This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5180Customize menu.
5181
5182** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5183the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5184
5185** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5186buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5187invoked.
5188
5189** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5190that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5191The default is 1.
5192
5193** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5194syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5195new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5196(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5197sensibly.
5198
5199** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5200
5201** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5202value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5203two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5204
5205** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5206reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5207for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5208every night.
5209
5210** Desktop changes
5211
5212*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5213the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5214
5215*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5216and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5217
5218** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5219read and post multi-lingual articles.
5220
5221** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5222doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5223be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5224outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5225the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5226made invisible again.
5227
5228** Mail reading and sending changes
5229
5230*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5231the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5232changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5233toggle.
5234
5235*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5236now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5237summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5238the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5239rmail-default-body-file.
5240
5241*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5242longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5243handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5244
5245*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5246it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5247is evaluated to insert the signature.
5248
5249*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5250outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5251handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5252putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5253transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5254especially interested in trying feedmail.
5255
5256feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5257feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5258provided by feedmail are:
5259
5260**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5261stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5262there is also a queue for draft messages
5263
5264**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5265be prompted for confirmation
5266
5267**** does smart filling of address headers
5268
5269**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5270the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5271can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5272
5273**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5274the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5275/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5276function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5277
5278** Dired changes
5279
5280*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5281files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5282
5283*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5284run Dired on the directory name at point.
5285
5286*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5287files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5288for a specified regexp.
5289
5290** VC Changes
5291
5292*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5293conveniently.
5294
5295*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5296faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5297Dired.
5298
5299VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5300directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5301listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5302currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5303
5304You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5305then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5306vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5307control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5308on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5309
5310All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5311is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5312`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5313the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5314`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5315
5316The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5317toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5318VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5319`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5320
5321Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5322ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5323command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5324
5325*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5326file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5327session to resolve them.
5328
5329Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5330resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5331contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5332uses as well).
5333
5334*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5335command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5336you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5337either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5338branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5339If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5340using ediff.
5341
5342** Changes in Font Lock
5343
5344*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5345are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5346use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5347unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5348compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5349
5350** Frame name display changes
5351
5352*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5353frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5354raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5355when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5356
5357*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5358frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5359menu.
5360
5361** Comint (subshell) changes
5362
5363*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5364subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5365with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5366
5367*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5368
5369C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5370that is, the line after the last line you got.
5371You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5372
5373C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5374send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5375the following line.
5376
5377C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5378which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5379previously sent input.
5380
5381C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5382it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5383as the search string.
5384
5385*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5386automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5387
5388** C mode changes
5389
5390*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5391and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5392assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5393definition.
5394
5395*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5396(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5397Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5398style is still the default however.
5399
5400*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5401
5402*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5403are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5404them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5405
5406*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5407and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5408
5409*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5410namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5411
5412*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5413makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5414
5415*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5416c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5417
5418*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5419should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5420package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5421variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5422
5423** Changes to hippie-expand.
5424
5425*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5426non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5427which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5428
5429*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5430non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5431expanding dynamically.
5432
5433*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5434non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5435
5436*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5437non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5438this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5439expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5440
5441*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5442
5443** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5444
5445*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5446bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5447automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5448bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5449against the first word in the title.
5450
5451*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5452capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5453bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5454lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5455lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5456bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5457
5458*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5459generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5460replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5461bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5462
5463** Changes in vcursor.el.
5464
5465*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5466and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5467variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5468entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5469`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5470in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5471
5472*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5473Editing group once the package is loaded.
5474
5475*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5476generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5477vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5478
5479*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5480vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5481
5482** Ispell changes.
5483
5484*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5485buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5486are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5487
5488*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5489A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5490and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5491defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5492include:
5493
5494 o URLs are automatically skipped
5495 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5496
5497*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5498
5499** Changes to RefTeX mode
5500
5501RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5502large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5503re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5504section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5505
5506*** New recursive parser.
5507
5508The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5509entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5510recursive parser scans the individual files.
5511
5512*** Parsing only part of a document.
5513
5514Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5515partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5516the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5517
5518 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5519
5520*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5521
5522This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5523
5524 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5525
5526*** Using multiple selection buffers
5527
5528If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5529for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5530
5531 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5532
5533*** References to external documents.
5534
5535The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5536documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5537documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5538macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5539RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5540the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5541The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5542
5543*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5544
5545The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5546and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5547
5548Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5549the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5550
5551*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5552
5553The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5554buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5555
5556*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5557
5558The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5559contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5560`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5561have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5562enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5563at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5564more.
5565
5566*** Support for the varioref package
5567
5568The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5569
5570*** New hooks
5571
5572Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5573and citations are created. These hooks are
5574`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5575`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5576
5577*** Citations outside LaTeX
5578
5579The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5580a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5581
5582*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5583
5584The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5585fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5586fontified, use
5587
5588 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5589
5590** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5591With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5592the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5593directories that contain the same file name.
5594
5595Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5596Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5597file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5598Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5599have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5600names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5601directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5602directory.
5603
5604** New modes and packages
5605
5606*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5607It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5608it, but some do not.
5609
5610*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5611code.
5612
5613*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5614current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5615around in a buffer.
5616
5617Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5618
5619*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5620uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5621be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5622established system of notation similar to Chess.
5623
5624*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5625documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5626guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5627
5628*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5629available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5630system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5631simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5632functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5633the like.
5634
5635*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5636identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5637
5638*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5639within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5640used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5641the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5642
5643*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5644
5645 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5646 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5647 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5648 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5649 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5650 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5651 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5652 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5653 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5654 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5655 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5656
5657 Platform-specific modes:
5658
5659 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5660 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5661 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5662 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5663 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5664 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5665 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5666 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5667 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5668\f
5669* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5670
5671** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5672use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5673That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5674Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5675
5676Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5677you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5678consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5679
5680** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5681and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5682specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5683searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5684
5685** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5686multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5687character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5688environment.
5689
5690** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5691take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5692string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5693current input method for reading this one event.
5694
5695** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5696now control whether to output certain characters as
5697backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5698non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5699characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5700in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5701\f
5702* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5703
5704** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5705of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5706
5707** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5708in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5709always increases point by 1.
5710
5711The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5712considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5713
5714See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5715
5716** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5717Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5718default value changed. For example,
5719
5720 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5721 :type 'integer
5722 :group 'foo
5723 :version "20.3")
5724
5725 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5726 :version "20.3")
5727
5728If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5729default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5730is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5731`:version' in the top level group.
5732
5733This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5734
5735** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5736starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5737
5738However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5739symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5740support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5741to themselves.
5742
5743If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5744this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5745values whatever.
5746
5747** There is a new debugger command, R.
5748It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5749in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5750
5751** Frame-local variables.
5752
5753You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5754the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5755local bindings for that variable.
5756
5757These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5758frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5759modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5760parameter name.
5761
5762Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5763Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5764active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5765that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5766
5767It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5768clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5769very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5770through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5771
5772** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5773"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5774evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5775makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5776See the documentation in sregex.el.
5777
5778** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5779is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5780parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5781The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5782
5783** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5784If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5785
5786** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5787known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5788define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5789
5790** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5791when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5792it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5793history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5794
5795The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5796return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5797empty input.
5798
5799** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5800for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5801`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5802Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5803`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5804
5805** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5806echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5807a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5808default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5809
5810** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5811specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5812function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5813place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5814non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5815
5816** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5817If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5818up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5819end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5820
5821** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5822which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5823If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5824
5825** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5826holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5827was directed to display this buffer.
5828
5829** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5830with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5831describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5832other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5833set-window-configuration.
5834
5835** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5836window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5837positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5838windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5839
5840** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5841override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5842look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5843
5844If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5845non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5846map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5847
5848minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5849and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5850
5851** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5852except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5853
5854** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5855USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5856floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5857
5858** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5859to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5860in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5861it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5862
5863** Menu changes
5864
5865*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5866keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5867better supported.
5868
5869The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5870a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5871you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5872can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5873then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5874
5875*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5876
5877In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5878 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5879defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5880starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5881
5882The format is:
5883 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5884 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5885where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5886string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5887The supported properties include
5888
5889:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5890 item is enabled.
5891:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5892 item should appear in the menu.
5893:filter FILTER-FN
5894 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5895 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5896 It should return a binding to use instead.
5897:keys DESCRIPTION
5898 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5899 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5900 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5901:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5902 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5903 keyboard binding.
5904:key-sequence nil
5905 This means that the command normally has no
5906 keyboard equivalent.
5907:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5908:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5909 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5910 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5911 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5912
5913Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5914Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5915
5916(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5917
5918** New event types
5919
5920*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5921mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5922corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5923which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5924
5925 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5926
5927where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5928same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5929indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5930negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5931the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5932forward, away from the user.
5933
5934As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5935
5936*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5937files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5938and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5939filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5940loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5941
5942 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5943
5944where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5945same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5946that were dragged and dropped.
5947
5948As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5949
5950** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5951
5952*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5953any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5954to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5955
5956*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5957can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5958that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5959
5960*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5961in Emacs 19 and before.
5962
5963The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5964The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5965
5966*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5967buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5968unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5969representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5970
5971This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5972as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5973viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5974one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5975will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5976
5977This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5978representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5979(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5980consistent with the new representation.
5981
5982*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5983representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5984about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5985however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5986
5987The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5988nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5989using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5990
5991*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5992representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5993representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5994
5995The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5996loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5997is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5998
5999*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6000which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6001
6002*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6003which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6004
6005*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6006portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6007so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6008You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6009
6010*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6011it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6012
6013*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6014convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6015buffer or string being searched.
6016
6017One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6018[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6019searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6020searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6021obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6022you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6023expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6024
6025*** Structure of coding system changed.
6026
6027All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6028by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6029which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6030as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6031vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6032your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6033define-coding-system-alias.
6034
6035The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6036the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6037access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6038pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6039character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6040safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6041'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6042`iso-8859-1'.
6043
6044Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6045The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6046coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6047(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6048
6049Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6050also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6051are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6052the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6053
6054*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6055proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6056This function requires a user interaction.
6057
6058*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6059find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6060select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6061systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6062a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6063select-safe-coding-system.
6064
6065*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6066decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6067last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6068was done.
6069
6070*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6071used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6072coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6073
6074*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6075return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6076characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6077`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6078
6079*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6080coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6081coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6082converted.
6083
6084*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6085coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6086
6087*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6088character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6089character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6090each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6091either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6092range of characters.
6093
6094*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6095Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6096
6097*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6098in the current buffer at position POS.
6099
6100*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6101input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6102function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6103character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6104event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6105binding input-method-function to nil.
6106
6107The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6108method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6109input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6110the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6111not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6112
6113The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6114subsequent events of a key sequence.
6115
6116*** You can customize any language environment by using
6117set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6118
6119The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6120customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6121instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6122environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6123exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6124\f
6125* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6126
6127** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6128options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6129at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6130tree structure.
6131
6132M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6133user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6134
6135With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6136session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6137in your .emacs file.)
6138
6139** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6140You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6141
6142** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6143This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6144
6145** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6146immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6147kills the region.
6148
6149The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6150delete the character before point, as usual.
6151
6152** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6153on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6154by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6155
6156** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6157insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6158the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6159onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6160history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6161past.)
6162
6163** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6164This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6165in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6166TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6167makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6168
6169As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6170and is an alias for it.
6171
6172If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6173use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6174
6175** Scrolling changes
6176
6177*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6178position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6179
6180In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6181on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6182where it started.
6183
6184*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6185move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6186screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6187does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6188
6189*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6190top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6191comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6192recenters the window.
6193
6194** International character set support (MULE)
6195
6196Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6197including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6198Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6199Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6200features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6201MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6202
6203Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6204coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6205character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6206variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6207into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6208
6209Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6210generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6211supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6212language, to make it possible to type them.
6213
6214The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6215character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6216
6217The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6218to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6219
6220You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6221
6222 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6223
6224Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6225characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6226argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6227already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6228characters for their work until they want to change.
6229
6230*** Input methods
6231
6232An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6233specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6234has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6235the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6236support several input methods.
6237
6238The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6239another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6240work.
6241
6242A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6243characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6244composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6245consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6246sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6247letter.
6248
6249The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6250by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6251First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6252marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6253mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6254
6255None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6256they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6257phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6258converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6259
6260Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6261word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6262typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6263the first guess is wrong.
6264
6265*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6266turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6267
6268If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6269byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6270they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6271the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6272
6273However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6274use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6275includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6276translate automatically to and from either one.
6277
6278*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6279
6280Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6281file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6282sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6283what you want.
6284
6285If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6286example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6287system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6288multibyte characters in that buffer.
6289
6290If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6291character conversion as well.
6292
6293*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6294
6295A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6296Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6297requires using many fonts.
6298
6299Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6300collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6301
6302A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6303the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6304have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6305you would use a font.
6306
6307If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6308specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6309display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6310
6311The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6312(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6313characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6314or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6315and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6316
6317*** Defining fontsets.
6318
6319Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6320chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6321with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6322
6323Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6324of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6325`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6326standard fontset are created automatically.
6327
6328If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6329argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6330FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6331with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6332name is `fontset-startup'.
6333
6334Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6335The resource value should have this form:
6336 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6337FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6338 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6339 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6340 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6341The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6342of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6343CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6344FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6345
6346Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6347last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6348You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6349
6350For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6351font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6352following resource,
6353 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6354the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6355 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6356Here is the substitution rule:
6357 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6358 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6359 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6360 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6361 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6362
6363The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6364fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6365that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6366
6367With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6368like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6369name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6370fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6371fontsets.
6372
6373*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6374defaults for a particular choice of language.
6375
6376Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6377method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6378visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6379already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6380language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6381system for new files that you create.
6382
6383It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6384set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6385whole Emacs session.
6386
6387For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6388chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6389with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6390
6391*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6392specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6393specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6394the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6395coding systems that Emacs supports.
6396
6397*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6398lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6399This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6400After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6401is used for *the immediately following command*.
6402
6403So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6404write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6405
6406If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6407then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6408
6409For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6410visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6411
6412*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6413construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6414to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6415specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6416of the file.
6417
6418*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6419the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6420code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6421translated into that character code.
6422
6423This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6424various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6425
6426By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6427
6428*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6429the coding system for keyboard input.
6430
6431Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6432with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6433some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6434
6435By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6436
6437Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6438input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6439translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6440to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6441designed to work with terminals.
6442
6443*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6444specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6445This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6446has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6447translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6448in the corresponding buffer.
6449
6450By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6451
6452*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6453to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6454It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6455
6456*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6457an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6458command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6459want to use.
6460
6461C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6462method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6463
6464*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6465layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6466remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6467which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6468
6469*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6470the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6471related information.
6472
6473*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6474HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6475scripts.
6476
6477*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6478information about the support for a particular language.
6479You specify the language as an argument.
6480
6481*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6482the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6483first dash.
6484
6485A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6486(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6487whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64881 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6489
6490 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6491 B big5 (Chinese)
6492 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6493 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6494 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6495 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6496 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6497 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6498 K euc-korea (Korean)
6499 R koi8 (Russian)
6500 Q tibetan
6501 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6502 T lao
6503 T tis620 (Thai)
6504 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6505 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6506 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6507 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6508 z hz (Chinese)
6509
6510When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6511two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6512coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6513keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6514
6515*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6516conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6517
6518When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6519into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6520rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6521Rmail files themselves.
6522
6523*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6524conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6525
6526Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6527for sending mail:
6528
6529- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6530- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6531- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6532 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6533- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6534
6535*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6536to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6537Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6538translations.
6539
6540** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6541of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6542insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6543without any conversion.
6544
6545** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6546You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6547RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6548any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6549
6550** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6551functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6552
6553Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6554Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6555
6556Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6557mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6558
6559** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6560complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6561in the buffer before point.
6562
6563With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6564symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6565you are using.
6566
6567With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6568just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6569
6570** File locking works with NFS now.
6571
6572The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6573in the same directory as FILENAME.
6574
6575This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6576works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6577can become a bottleneck.
6578
6579The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6580does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6581create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6582file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6583rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6584so useful that the change is worth while.
6585
6586When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6587are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6588collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6589tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6590
6591** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6592it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6593show-paren-mode.
6594
6595** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6596selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6597delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6598
6599** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6600within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6601complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6602
6603** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6604it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6605set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6606
6607** Changes in View mode.
6608
6609*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6610Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6611
6612*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6613view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6614
6615*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6616previous state.
6617
6618*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6619scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6620
6621*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6622non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6623not just the selected window.
6624
6625*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6626read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6627turns View mode on or off.
6628
6629*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6630how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6631delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6632
6633** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6634now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6635
6636** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6637has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6638presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6639which version to compare with.
6640
6641** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6642blocks if a match is inside the block.
6643
6644The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6645is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6646isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6647shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6648
6649By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6650of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6651blocks, all of them or none.
6652
6653** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6654current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6655confirmation first.
6656
6657** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6658now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6659However, the mode will not be changed if
6660(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6661(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6662 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6663(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6664
6665This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6666
6667However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6668these commands do not change the major mode.
6669
6670** M-x occur changes.
6671
6672*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6673it performs a case-sensitive search.
6674
6675*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6676if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6677using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6678
6679** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6680in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6681window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6682that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6683buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6684
6685** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6686after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6687appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6688come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6689
6690** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6691selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6692buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6693
6694** Outline mode changes.
6695
6696*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6697
6698*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6699
6700** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6701you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6702Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6703was already active.
6704
6705The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6706unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6707get confused by it.
6708
6709If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6710set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6711
6712** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6713
6714*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6715conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6716character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6717including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6718
6719The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6720mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6721copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6722
6723*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6724are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6725values.
6726
6727`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6728case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6729`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6730case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6731
6732** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6733certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6734can be. The default value is 30.
6735
6736** Changes in Mail mode.
6737
6738*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6739Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6740composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6741`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6742`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6743behavior.
6744
6745C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6746compose-mail-other-frame.
6747
6748*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6749the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6750replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6751buffer that shows the original message.
6752
6753*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6754with separator lines around the contents.
6755
6756*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6757in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6758definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6759need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6760
6761*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6762
6763**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6764for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6765controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6766Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6767
6768**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6769to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6770/etc/passwd.
6771
6772**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6773to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6774/etc/passwd.
6775
6776** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6777special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6778directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6779reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6780
6781Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6782when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6783be taken to be magic.
6784
6785** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6786files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6787available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6788
6789M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6790(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6791
6792** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6793suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6794
6795In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6796
6797new key dired.el binding old key
6798------- ---------------- -------
6799 * c dired-change-marks c
6800 * m dired-mark m
6801 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6802 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6803 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6804 * u dired-unmark u
6805 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6806 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6807 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6808 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6809 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6810 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6811
6812** Rmail changes.
6813
6814*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6815saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6816chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6817each time you run it.
6818
6819*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6820whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6821
6822*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6823messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6824means to move in the opposite direction.
6825
6826*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6827you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6828
6829*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6830just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6831It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6832can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6833for output.
6834
6835** Gnus changes.
6836
6837*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6838
6839*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6840Gnus.
6841
6842*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6843`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6844
6845*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6846article mode line.
6847
6848*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6849
6850*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6851
6852(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6853
6854*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6855are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6856`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6857
6858*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6859
6860*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6861
6862*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6863See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6864
6865*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6866Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6867used to pick articles.
6868
6869*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6870another have been added.
6871
6872 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6873
6874*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6875generating lines in buffers.
6876
6877*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6878`M-C-_'.
6879
6880*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6881
6882*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6883
6884 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6885
6886*** Scores can be decayed.
6887
6888 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6889
6890*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6891Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6892
6893*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6894the native server.
6895
6896 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6897
6898*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6899(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6900
6901*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6902
6903*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6904even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6905
6906*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6907(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6908
6909 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6910 a group.
6911
6912*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6913sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6914
6915 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6916
6917*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6918
6919 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6920
6921*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6922
6923 Use the `Y c' command.
6924
6925*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6926
6927*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6928
6929 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6930
6931*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6932from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6933
6934 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6935
6936*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6937
6938*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6939the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6940
6941 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6942
6943Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6944and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6945from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6946hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6947this issue.)
6948
6949Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6950automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6951particular news group. This can be done by:
6952
6953 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6954
6955Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6956of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6957"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6958system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6959for reading and posting).
6960
6961CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6962 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6963Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6964newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6965there.
6966
6967Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6968default. Here are some of these default settings:
6969
6970 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6971 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6972 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6973 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6974 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6975
6976When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6977the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6978
6979** CC mode changes.
6980
6981*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6982code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6983values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6984this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6985Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6986loaded.
6987
6988If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6989Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6990style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6991share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6992c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6993must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6994
6995*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6996of the current buffer.
6997
6998*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6999it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7000of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7001
7002*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7003style that the Python developers like.
7004
7005*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7006This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7007just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7008
7009** VC Changes [new]
7010
7011** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7012name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7013directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7014
7015This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7016master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7017developers.
7018
7019You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7020RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7021
7022*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7023other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7024writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7025calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7026
7027*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7028version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7029
7030** Calendar changes.
7031
7032A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7033of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7034for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7035
7036** ps-print changes
7037
7038There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7039
7040*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7041
7042The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7043formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7044`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7045`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7046It defaults to `letter'.
7047If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7048
7049The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7050of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7051non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7052
7053The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7054It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7055It defaults to 1.
7056
7057*** Horizontal layout
7058
7059The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7060`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7061All are measured in points.
7062
7063*** Vertical layout
7064
7065The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7066`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7067All are measured in points.
7068
7069*** Headers
7070
7071If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7072`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7073margin above the text.
7074
7075If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7076framing box is printed around the header.
7077
7078The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7079`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7080
7081The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7082`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7083`ps-header-font-size'.
7084
7085*** Font managing
7086
7087The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7088used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7089`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7090elements to this alist.
7091
7092The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7093for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7094
7095** hideshow changes.
7096
7097*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7098C++, ; for lisp).
7099
7100*** Support for java-mode added.
7101
7102*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7103in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7104
7105*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7106the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7107way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7108
7109*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7110robust and a lot faster.
7111
7112*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7113
7114*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7115to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7116documentation for more details.
7117
7118** Changes in Enriched mode.
7119
7120*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7121filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7122of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7123use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7124the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7125
7126*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7127distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7128as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7129as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7130
7131** Font Lock mode
7132
7133*** Custom support
7134
7135The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7136font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7137faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7138group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7139your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7140consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7141
7142You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7143
7144*** Maximum decoration
7145
7146Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7147default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7148of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7149supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7150to get the old behavior.
7151
7152*** New support
7153
7154Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7155
7156Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7157support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7158
7159*** Configurable support
7160
7161Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7162additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7163c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7164java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7165list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7166of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7167convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7168
7169Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7170way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7171it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7172
7173*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7174
7175You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7176highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7177for any mode.
7178
7179For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7180
7181 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7182
7183in your ~/.emacs.
7184
7185*** New faces
7186
7187Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7188font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7189distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7190to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7191
7192*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7193
7194The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7195cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7196same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7197
7198*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7199
7200The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7201according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7202the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7203non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7204refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7205the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7206Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7207
7208This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7209For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7210this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7211refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7212containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7213the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7214
7215As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7216
7217Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7218Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7219Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7220new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7221
7222If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7223settings.
7224
7225** Ada mode changes.
7226
7227*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7228If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7229procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7230you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7231stubs.
7232
7233*** There are two new commands:
7234 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7235 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7236
7237The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7238`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7239`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7240
7241*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7242is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7243Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7244
7245*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7246formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7247places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7248space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7249
7250** Scheme mode changes.
7251
7252*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7253mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7254for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7255with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7256have any effect.
7257
7258If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7259still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7260scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7261variables as buffer-local variables.
7262
7263*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7264Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7265
7266** Changes to the emacsclient program
7267
7268*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7269USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7270associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7271can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7272
7273*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7274it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7275buffer in Emacs.
7276
7277*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7278use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7279ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7280option takes precedence.
7281
7282** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7283constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7284(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7285
7286** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7287which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7288the current defun.
7289
7290** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7291following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7292
7293** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7294and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7295necessary).
7296
7297** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7298if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7299these register values no longer become completely useless.
7300If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7301asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7302it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7303
7304** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7305example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7306be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7307you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7308
7309You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7310variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7311file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7312revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7313only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7314
7315** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7316since it applies only to the current frame.
7317
7318** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7319file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7320and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7321
7322This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7323multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7324variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7325tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7326instead of just the file you are editing.
7327
7328** RefTeX mode
7329
7330RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7331and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7332different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7333multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7334turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7335
7336C-c ( reftex-label
7337 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7338 knows which kind of label is needed.
7339
7340C-c ) reftex-reference
7341 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7342 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7343
7344C-c [ reftex-citation
7345 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7346 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7347
7348C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7349 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7350
7351C-c = reftex-toc
7352 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7353 can quickly jump to every section.
7354
7355Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7356commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7357Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7358reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7359C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7360
7361** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7362
7363*** Info documentation is now available.
7364
7365*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7366both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7367
7368*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7369bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7370
7371*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7372(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7373
7374*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7375entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7376appropriate functions.
7377
7378*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7379entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7380
7381*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7382been cleaned.
7383
7384*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7385bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7386
7387*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7388shall be delimited.
7389
7390*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7391bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7392bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7393
7394*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7395field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7396prefixed with `ALT'.
7397
7398*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7399bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7400formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7401documentation).
7402
7403*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7404documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7405for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7406
7407*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7408comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7409
7410*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7411alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7412signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7413
7414*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7415
7416*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7417
7418*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7419from alien sources.
7420
7421*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7422to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7423crossref entries.
7424
7425*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7426region.
7427
7428*** Added support for imenu.
7429
7430*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7431of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7432`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7433`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7434
7435*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7436from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7437
7438** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7439
7440** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7441
7442** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7443functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7444Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7445as an argument.
7446
7447When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7448and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7449
7450** browse-url changes
7451
7452*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7453Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7454(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7455non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7456customization variables.
7457
7458*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7459
7460*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7461lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7462(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7463
7464** Changes in Ediff
7465
7466*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7467pops up the Info file for this command.
7468
7469*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7470the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7471merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7472directories).
7473
7474*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7475and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7476files in the same directory.
7477
7478*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7479The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7480related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7481
7482** Changes in Viper
7483
7484*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7485*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7486 instead of vip-.
7487*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7488*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7489Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7490*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7491*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7492*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7493color when Viper is in insert state.
7494*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7495Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7496viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7497
7498** Etags changes.
7499
7500*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7501default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7502Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7503variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7504not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7505
7506*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7507
7508*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7509constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7510
7511*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7512recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7513In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7514
7515*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7516C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7517recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7518methods and protocols.
7519
7520*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7521.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7522column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7523paragraph name.
7524
7525*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7526an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7527at least M times and as many as N times.
7528
7529** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7530in files has changed slightly.
7531
7532With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7533time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7534This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7535with old time-stamp-format values.
7536
7537In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7538(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7539This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7540reasons.
7541
7542In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7543natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7544fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7545(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7546time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7547specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7548
7549Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7550case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7551truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7552
7553The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7554being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7555future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7556recommended now will continue to work then.
7557
7558See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7559details.
7560
7561** There are some additional major modes:
7562
7563dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7564m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7565meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7566
7567** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7568copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7569into Emacs.
7570
7571** New Lisp packages include:
7572
7573*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7574
7575*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7576be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7577
7578*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7579
7580*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7581in shell buffers.
7582
7583*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7584See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7585and `elint-defun'.
7586
7587*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7588meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7589ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7590strings or comments.
7591
7592These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7593abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7594you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7595insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7596at these points.
7597
7598*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7599can visit them by short forms of their names.
7600
7601*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7602Emacs Lisp function at point.
7603
7604*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7605
7606*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7607switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7608
7609*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7610
7611*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7612
7613*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7614
7615*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7616from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7617
7618*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7619You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7620inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7621original place after inserting the copy.
7622
7623*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7624on the buffer.
7625
7626You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7627velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7628(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7629
7630Enable mouse-drag with:
7631 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7632-or-
7633 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7634
7635*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7636mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7637
7638*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7639It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7640
7641*** ogonek
7642
7643The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7644Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7645platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7646TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7647ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7648prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7649instance) and vice versa.
7650
7651To use this package load it using
7652 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7653Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7654 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7655 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7656The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7657ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7658
7659*** Interface to ph.
7660
7661Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7662
7663The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7664services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7665these servers.
7666
7667*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7668
7669*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7670You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7671while the real cursor does not move.
7672
7673*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7674for visiting your favorite web sites.
7675
7676*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7677so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7678
7679** movemail change
7680
7681Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7682mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7683supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7684user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7685
7686This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7687\f
7688* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7689
7690** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7691
7692Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7693end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7694Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7695file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7696file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7697
7698To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7699C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7700coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7701specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7702LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7703save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7704\f
7705* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7706
7707** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7708Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7709vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7710Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7711
7712** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7713to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7714
7715In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7716don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7717"win".
7718
7719** Basic Lisp changes
7720
7721*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7722evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7723
7724*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7725be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7726or by the user.
7727
7728The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7729
7730*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7731
7732(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7733(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7734
7735*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7736usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7737its argument.
7738
7739*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7740
7741*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7742
7743*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7744
7745*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7746error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7747include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7748`format' function.
7749
7750*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7751or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7752whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7753
7754*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7755either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7756adding one of these suffixes.
7757
7758*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7759which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7760If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7761
7762We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7763because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7764
7765*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7766
7767*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7768You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7769
7770*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7771conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7772
7773 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7774
7775BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7776BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7777
7778*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7779choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7780restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7781works using `save-current-buffer'.
7782
7783*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7784write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7785of the last form.
7786
7787*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7788which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7789last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7790as the last form.
7791
7792*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7793characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7794matches.
7795
7796For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7797
7798*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7799with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7800Then it returns that string.
7801
7802For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7803
7804(with-output-to-string
7805 (princ "The buffer is ")
7806 (princ (buffer-name)))
7807
7808returns "The buffer is foo".
7809
7810** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7811is non-nil.
7812
7813These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7814buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7815characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7816
7817*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7818a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7819
7820Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7821character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7822Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7823position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7824characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7825 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7826
7827ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7828Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7829non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7830characters".
7831
7832The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7833through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7834"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7835range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7836leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7837
7838*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7839(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7840multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7841character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7842
7843This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7844always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7845
7846However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7847
7848*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7849because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7850have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7851the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7852guaranteed.
7853
7854*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7855between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7856character).
7857
7858When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7859
7860 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7861 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7862 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7863 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7864 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7865
7866*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7867
7868*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7869`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7870more than the number of characters.
7871
7872You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7873it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7874\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7875is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7876follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7877newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7878
7879*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7880and returns a string containing those characters.
7881
7882*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7883(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7884counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7885character, sref signals an error.
7886
7887*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7888in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7889string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7890
7891*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7892in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7893region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7894
7895*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7896the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7897to a vector of the characters in it.
7898
7899*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7900of a string. You call it as follows:
7901
7902 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7903
7904This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7905STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7906This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7907Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7908it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7909
7910*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7911if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7912
7913*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7914if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7915
7916*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7917to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7918not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7919which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7920
7921(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7922
7923This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7924
7925The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7926If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7927are not included in the resulting value.
7928
7929The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7930at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7931WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7932is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7933
7934If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7935place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7936character extends across that column), then the padding character
7937PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7938string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7939column START-COLUMN.
7940
7941*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7942the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7943necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7944difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7945changed text, before the change.
7946
7947*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7948sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7949one character set for each script, not for each language.
7950
7951**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7952
7953**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7954
7955**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7956set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7957
7958**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7959name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7960which identify the character within that character set.
7961
7962**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7963byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7964opposite of split-char.
7965
7966**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7967of all the characters between BEG and END.
7968
7969**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7970of all the characters in a string.
7971
7972*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7973and specifying coding systems.
7974
7975**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7976system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7977of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7978(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7979and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7980as what to do about code conversion.)
7981
7982**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7983name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7984
7985**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7986for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7987except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7988
7989Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7990which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7991to match against a file name.
7992
7993VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7994a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7995decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7996to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7997systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7998specifies the coding system for encoding.
7999
8000If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8001or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8002
8003**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8004the coding system to use for network sockets.
8005
8006Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8007which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8008either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8009service names.
8010
8011VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8012a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8013decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8014to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8015systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8016specifies the coding system for encoding.
8017
8018If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8019or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8020
8021**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8022for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8023except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8024start the subprocess.
8025
8026**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8027systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8028when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8029(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8030to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8031
8032**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8033coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8034subprocess.
8035
8036It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8037but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8038start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8039connection permanently or until overridden.
8040
8041The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8042file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8043network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8044coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8045It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8046system for one operation at a time.
8047
8048**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8049files, subprocesses or network connections.
8050
8051**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8052coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8053The value is a cons cell,
8054 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8055where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8056the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8057input to the subprocess.
8058
8059**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8060change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8061
8062** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8063customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8064you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8065
8066You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8067variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8068information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8069legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8070customization.
8071
8072Thus, instead of writing
8073
8074 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8075 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8076
8077you would now write this:
8078
8079 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8080 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8081 :type 'boolean
8082 :group foo)
8083
8084The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8085two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8086describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8087for a description of them.
8088
8089The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8090should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8091
8092 (defgroup ispell nil
8093 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8094 :group 'processes)
8095
8096The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8097group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8098but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8099to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8100second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8101
8102Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8103package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8104have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8105package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8106first-level subgroups.
8107
8108** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8109
8110This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8111separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8112
8113** easy-mmode
8114
8115The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8116developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8117only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8118predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8119`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8120`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8121
8122** Text property changes
8123
8124*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8125text property.
8126
8127*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8128previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8129place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8130functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8131starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8132
8133If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8134LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8135of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8136position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8137
8138*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8139value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8140is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8141
8142** Changes in invisibility features
8143
8144*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8145hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8146is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8147should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8148would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8149make the overlay visible.
8150
8151During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8152invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8153needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8154which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8155the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8156t when it should hide it.
8157
8158*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8159
8160Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8161invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8162and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8163Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8164manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8165Here is an example of how to do this:
8166
8167 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8168 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8169 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8170 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8171
8172 ...
8173 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8174
8175 ...
8176 ;; When done with the overlays:
8177 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8178 ;; Or respectively:
8179 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8180
8181** Changes in syntax parsing.
8182
8183*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8184`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8185obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8186`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8187
8188If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8189is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8190used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8191
8192When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8193character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8194
8195 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8196 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8197
8198 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8199 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8200 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8201
8202 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8203 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8204 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8205 determine the syntax type of the character.
8206
8207 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8208 of the current buffer.
8209
8210*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8211value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8212for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8213
8214*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8215and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8216only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8217character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8218another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8219
8220These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8221text property.
8222
8223*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8224arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8225of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8226
8227*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8228(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8229element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8230nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8231string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8232
8233*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8234syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8235`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8236
8237** Changes in face features
8238
8239*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8240if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8241
8242*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8243of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8244
8245*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8246set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8247
8248*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8249set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8250
8251*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8252by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8253and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8254the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8255overlay property).
8256
8257This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8258arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8259
8260** Changes in file-handling functions
8261
8262*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8263directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8264they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8265is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8266
8267This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8268begins with ~.
8269
8270*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8271it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8272
8273*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8274the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8275
8276*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8277as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8278
8279*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8280character code conversion as well as other things.
8281
8282Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8283(formerly it did not).
8284
8285*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8286environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8287
8288*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8289instead of constant strings.
8290
8291*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8292to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8293any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8294
8295substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8296in the same way as before.
8297
8298*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8299The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8300which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8301
8302*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8303error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8304else, and returns nil.
8305
8306*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8307directory cannot be listed.
8308
8309** Changes in minibuffer input
8310
8311*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8312read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8313additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8314argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8315ways:
8316
8317 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8318 It is available through the history command M-n.
8319
8320*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8321read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8322argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8323minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8324enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8325
8326In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8327argument in this way.
8328
8329*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8330from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8331minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8332
8333** Echo area features
8334
8335*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8336echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8337minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8338after the echo area is cleared.
8339
8340*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8341in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8342
8343** Keyboard input features
8344
8345*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8346set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8347
8348*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8349received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8350by keyboard macros.
8351
8352** Frame-related changes
8353
8354*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8355creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8356hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8357
8358*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8359the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8360has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8361
8362*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8363selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8364value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8365in the selected frame.
8366
8367*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8368is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8369which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8370
8371** X Windows features
8372
8373*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8374x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8375x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8376
8377*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8378The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8379
8380*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8381MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8382A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8383
8384If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8385it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8386
8387** Subprocess features
8388
8389*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8390functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8391automatically.
8392
8393*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8394and returns the output from the command as a string.
8395
8396*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8397and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8398
8399** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8400does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8401
8402** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8403at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8404goes after the other menu items.
8405
8406** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8407of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8408around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8409are in use.
8410
8411The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8412series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8413
8414Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8415after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8416form.
8417
8418** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8419is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8420but its hook is still run.
8421
8422** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8423for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8424
8425If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8426regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8427useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8428
8429This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8430are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8431filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8432warned.
8433
8434** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8435way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8436
8437** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8438integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8439functions like display-time.
8440
8441** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8442name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8443
8444** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8445can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8446is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8447
8448** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8449if there is an error in compilation.
8450
8451** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8452switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8453argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8454they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8455
8456** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8457Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8458the *scratch* buffer.
8459
8460** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8461The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8462where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8463e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8464
8465** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8466and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8467It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8468
8469** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8470using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8471variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8472and compose-mail-other-frame.
8473
8474** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8475can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8476full name of the specified user will be returned.
8477
8478** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8479of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8480where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8481in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8482option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8483files at all.
8484
8485** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8486and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8487width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8488the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8489
8490For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8491minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8492with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8493is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8494
8495** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8496
8497** imenu.el changes.
8498
8499You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8500item from menu created by imenu.
8501
8502An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8503#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8504select one of those items.
8505\f
8506* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8507\f
8508* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8509
8510** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8511mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8512
8513** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8514use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8515Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8516\f
8517* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8518
8519** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8520To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8521
8522** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8523conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8524matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8525expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8526word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8527all caps.
8528
8529** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8530at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8531
8532When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8533does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8534as in previous Emacs versions.
8535
8536** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8537non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8538time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8539frames.
8540
8541** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8542if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8543This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8544Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8545accident.
8546
8547** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8548keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8549It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8550line and then executing the macro.
8551
8552This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8553
8554** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8555(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8556characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8557characters.
8558
8559** Font Lock mode
8560
8561*** Font Lock support modes
8562
8563Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8564below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8565hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8566to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8567Font Lock mode is enabled.
8568
8569For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8570
8571 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8572
8573in your ~/.emacs.
8574
8575*** lazy-lock
8576
8577The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8578only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8579becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8580Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8581occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8582buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8583Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8584
8585To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8586
8587 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8588
8589To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8590
8591** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8592
8593*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8594paren and key.
8595
8596*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8597supported.
8598
8599** Gnus changes.
8600
8601Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8602commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8603significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8604previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8605
8606Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8607between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8608
8609*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8610variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8611obsolete.
8612
8613*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8614missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8615
8616 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8617
8618*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8619
8620 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8621
8622*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8623referred.
8624
8625*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8626
8627 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8628
8629*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8630
8631 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8632
8633*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8634buffers.
8635
8636 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8637
8638*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8639
8640 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8641
8642*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8643
8644 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8645
8646*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8647
8648 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8649
8650*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8651is possible.
8652
8653 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8654
8655*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8656groups of groups.
8657
8658*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8659
8660*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8661batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8662
8663*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8664
8665*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8666
8667*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8668
8669 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8670
8671*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8672expiration times.
8673
8674*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8675
8676*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8677process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8678
8679*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8680articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8681bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8682
8683*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8684articles with the `*' command.
8685
8686*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8687
8688*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8689
8690 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8691
8692*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8693
8694*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8695`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8696
8697*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8698buffer.
8699
8700*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8701
8702*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8703
8704*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8705
8706 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8707
8708*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8709
8710 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8711
8712*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8713
8714*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8715
8716*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8717
8718 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8719 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8720
8721*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8722refetching.
8723
8724 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8725
8726*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8727buffer to allow easier treatment.
8728
8729*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8730
8731*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8732
8733 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8734
8735*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8736articles.
8737
8738 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8739
8740*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8741
8742*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8743cited text to hide is now customizable.
8744
8745 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8746
8747*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8748
8749 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8750
8751*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8752
8753*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8754
8755The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8756in greater detail.
8757\f
8758* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8759
8760** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8761second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8762asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8763exists.
8764
8765** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8766as well as lists.
8767
8768** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8769of a given keymap.
8770
8771** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8772given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8773keymap or nil.
8774
8775** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8776an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8777name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8778menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8779equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8780alias.
8781\f
8782* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8783
8784** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8785
8786Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8787This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8788was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8789far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8790pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8791
8792For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8793you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8794`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8795
8796** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8797
8798The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8799do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8800It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8801much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8802chapter of the manual for details.
8803
8804However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8805customization variables take effect.
8806
8807** Marking with the mouse.
8808
8809When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8810highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8811using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8812
8813** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8814
8815*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8816
8817*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8818to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8819
8820*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8821in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8822you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8823application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8824applications, these problems are significant.
8825
8826If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8827likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8828However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8829will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8830other DOS application as a subprocess.
8831
8832Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8833You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8834
8835If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8836subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8837have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8838Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8839separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8840Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8841
8842** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8843
8844This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8845which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8846minibuffer contains.
8847
8848** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8849
8850The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8851It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8852It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8853affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8854
8855The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8856it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8857and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8858when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8859
8860** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8861enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8862
8863** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8864F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8865Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8866
8867If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8868menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8869something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8870the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8871
8872 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8873
8874** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8875to replace the characters it "deletes".
8876
8877** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8878
8879** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8880a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8881select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8882It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8883immediately after the selected one.
8884
8885This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8886made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8887
8888** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8889
8890Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8891directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8892If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8893Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8894recover-session.
8895
8896You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8897auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8898will not work.
8899
8900Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8901normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8902this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8903bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8904now that the bug is fixed.
8905
8906** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8907
8908There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8909when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8910Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8911which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8912
8913If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8914telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8915VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8916the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8917
8918** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8919Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8920is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8921
8922There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8923Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8924enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8925The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8926remain normal.
8927
8928** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8929header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8930
8931Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8932known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8933offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8934Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8935
8936Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8937of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8938a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8939name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8940documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8941`mail-directory-stream'.)
8942
8943** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8944skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8945characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8946with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8947
8948Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8949- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8950wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8951
8952The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8953less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8954headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8955Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8956Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8957fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8958to a limitation in font-lock).
8959
8960External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8961
8962** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8963buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8964buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8965this example:
8966
8967 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8968 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8969
8970** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8971
8972*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8973
8974*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8975
8976*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8977
8978*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8979entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8980will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8981isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8982(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8983The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8984
8985*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8986does the same job.
8987
8988*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8989"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8990
8991*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8992text.
8993
8994** Font Lock mode
8995
8996*** Global Font Lock mode
8997
8998Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8999new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9000font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9001turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9002on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9003
9004For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9005
9006 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9007
9008in your ~/.emacs.
9009
9010*** Local Refontification
9011
9012In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9013However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9014those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9015command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9016
9017In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9018(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9019current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9020above and below point.
9021
9022With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9023
9024** Follow mode
9025
9026Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9027buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9028side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9029they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9030split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9031follow-mode.
9032
9033M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9034
9035To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9036command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9037
9038** hide-show changes.
9039
9040The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9041to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9042normal hooks.
9043
9044** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9045The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9046
9047** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9048recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9049those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9050
9051** MSDOS Changes
9052
9053*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9054Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9055
9056*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9057and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9058
9059*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9060
9061*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9062pressing both mouse buttons.
9063
9064*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9065restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9066are:
9067
9068**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9069now works.
9070
9071**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9072
9073**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9074implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9075
9076**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9077
9078**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9079
9080**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9081
9082**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9083
9084**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9085\f
9086* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9087
9088** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9089tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9090remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9091this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9092behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9093
9094** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9095
9096The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9097not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9098need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9099be different.
9100
9101It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9102than `system-type'.
9103
9104See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9105
9106** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9107now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9108
9109** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9110that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9111
9112** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9113no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9114reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9115
9116The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9117to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9118like this:
9119
9120 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9121
9122SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9123It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9124becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9125
9126REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9127seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9128means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9129
9130*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9131up if too much time passes.
9132
9133 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9134
9135This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9136If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9137of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9138form in BODY.
9139
9140*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9141a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9142call looks like this:
9143
9144 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9145
9146SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9147runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9148timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9149ARGS.
9150
9151Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9152command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9153command.
9154
9155REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9156time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9157does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9158each time Emacs becomes idle.
9159
9160If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9161idle for SECS seconds.
9162
9163*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9164all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9165programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9166instead.
9167
9168*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9169there is no answer within a certain time.
9170
9171 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9172
9173asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9174within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9175Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9176
9177** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9178arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9179meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9180arguments in between are ignored.
9181
9182This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9183the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9184
9185** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9186/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9187/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9188site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9189version.
9190
9191It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9192version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9193for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9194has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9195and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9196problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9197
9198** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9199.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9200systems with limited file name syntax.
9201
9202Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9203convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9204for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9205completions.el:
9206
9207(defvar save-completions-file-name
9208 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9209 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9210
9211This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9212depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9213convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9214Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9215MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9216
9217** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9218rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9219minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9220
9221** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9222marker from its buffer position.
9223
9224** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9225Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9226The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9227
9228** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9229that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9230condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9231of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9232matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9233regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9234
9235This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9236errors that happen often during editing.
9237
9238** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9239into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9240puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9241
9242** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9243now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9244
9245** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9246a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9247name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9248to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9249and not get-buffer-window.
9250
9251** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9252calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9253being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9254
9255If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9256buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9257property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9258non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9259are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9260property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9261over and over for the same text.
9262
9263** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9264
9265*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9266in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9267
9268;; @(#) HEADER: text
9269;; $HEADER: text $
9270
9271in addition to the normal
9272
9273;; HEADER: text
9274
9275*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9276checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9277lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9278
9279
a933dad1 9280\f
3787e12e 9281* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9282
9283----------------------------------------------------------------------
9284Copyright information:
9285
424d8b44 9286Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9287
9288 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9289 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9290 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9291 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9292
9293 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9294 of this document, or of portions of it,
9295 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9296 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9297\f
9298Local variables:
9299mode: outline
9300paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9301end: